WO2019029329A1 - 一种dmrs指示和接收方法，发射端和接收端 - Google Patents

一种dmrs指示和接收方法，发射端和接收端 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019029329A1
WO2019029329A1 PCT/CN2018/096201 CN2018096201W WO2019029329A1 WO 2019029329 A1 WO2019029329 A1 WO 2019029329A1 CN 2018096201 W CN2018096201 W CN 2018096201W WO 2019029329 A1 WO2019029329 A1 WO 2019029329A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
dmrs
port
information
indication information
configuration information
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2018/096201
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
任翔
刘永
戎璐
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to CA3053864A priority Critical patent/CA3053864C/en
Priority to KR1020197026180A priority patent/KR102276142B1/ko
Priority to EP22185386.4A priority patent/EP4145748A1/en
Priority to JP2019543018A priority patent/JP6943355B2/ja
Priority to EP18843740.4A priority patent/EP3584975B1/en
Priority to BR112019020884A priority patent/BR112019020884A2/pt
Publication of WO2019029329A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019029329A1/zh
Priority to US16/517,198 priority patent/US10715300B2/en
Priority to US16/917,139 priority patent/US11424898B2/en
Priority to US17/876,301 priority patent/US20230030162A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/02—Channels characterised by the type of signal
    • H04L5/06—Channels characterised by the type of signal the signals being represented by different frequencies
    • H04L5/10—Channels characterised by the type of signal the signals being represented by different frequencies with dynamo-electric generation of carriers; with mechanical filters or demodulators
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00—Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/26—Systems using multi-frequency codes
    • H04L27/2601—Multicarrier modulation systems
    • H04L27/2602—Signal structure
    • H04L27/261—Details of reference signals
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0001—Arrangements for dividing the transmission path
    • H04L5/0003—Two-dimensional division
    • H04L5/0005—Time-frequency
    • H04L5/0007—Time-frequency the frequencies being orthogonal, e.g. OFDM(A), DMT
    • H04L5/0008—Wavelet-division
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0001—Arrangements for dividing the transmission path
    • H04L5/0014—Three-dimensional division
    • H04L5/0016—Time-frequency-code
    • H04L5/0021—Time-frequency-code in which codes are applied as a frequency-domain sequences, e.g. MC-CDMA
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • H04L5/0051—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver of dedicated pilots, i.e. pilots destined for a single user or terminal
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0053—Allocation of signaling, i.e. of overhead other than pilot signals
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0091—Signaling for the administration of the divided path
    • H04L5/0092—Indication of how the channel is divided
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/02—Channels characterised by the type of signal
    • H04L5/023—Multiplexing of multicarrier modulation signals
    • H04L5/026—Multiplexing of multicarrier modulation signals using code division
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/20—Manipulation of established connections
    • H04W76/27—Transitions between radio resource control [RRC] states
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0413—MIMO systems
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0001—Arrangements for dividing the transmission path
    • H04L5/0014—Three-dimensional division
    • H04L5/0023—Time-frequency-space
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0032—Distributed allocation, i.e. involving a plurality of allocating devices, each making partial allocation
    • H04L5/0035—Resource allocation in a cooperative multipoint environment
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0091—Signaling for the administration of the divided path

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communications, and in particular, to a demodulation reference signal (DMRS) indication and reception method, a transmitting end and a receiving end.
  • DMRS demodulation reference signal
  • Multi-input Multiple-Output (Multiple-Input Multiple-Output, English abbreviation: MIMO) technology utilizes spatially dimensioned resources to obtain array gain, multiplexing, and diversity gain in space without increasing system bandwidth. And the interference cancellation gain multiplies the capacity and spectral efficiency of the communication system.
  • MIMO Multiple-Input Multiple-Output
  • LTE Long-Term Evolution
  • SU single user
  • DMRS occupies 24 REs.
  • the DMRS port may be mapped on the 0th, 1st, 5th, 6th, 10th, and 11th subcarriers of each resource block (RB) pair; in the time domain, the DMRS Ports can be mapped on 5, 6, 12, and 13 symbols per subframe. As shown in Figure 1.
  • the coherent demodulation performance is better than that of the non-coherent demodulation, and has an advantage of about 3 dB, and thus the coherent demodulation is more widely adopted by modern communication systems.
  • the modulation of each carrier in the OFDM system is to suppress the carrier, and the coherent demodulation at the receiving end requires a reference signal, which is also called a pilot signal or a reference signal (English name: Reference Signal, English abbreviation: RS).
  • the OFDM symbols are distributed in different time-frequency two-dimensional spatial resource units (English full name: Resource Element, English abbreviation: RE), and have known amplitude and phase.
  • each transmit antenna virtual antenna or physical antenna
  • the receiver performs channel estimation for each transmit antenna and restores the transmitted data based thereon.
  • Channel estimation refers to the process of reconstructing a received signal to compensate for channel fading and noise. It uses the RS that the transmitter and receiver are aware of to track the time and frequency domain variations of the channel.
  • the LTE/-A system defines a demodulation reference signal (English name: Demodulation Reference Signal, English abbreviation: DMRS), and the reference signal is used for uplink and downlink control channels and data channels.
  • DMRS Demodulation Reference Signal
  • PDSCH Physical Downlink shared channel demodulation.
  • the DMRS and user data use the same pre-processing method, which is characterized by:
  • each terminal data uses the same precoding matrix as its corresponding demodulation reference signal.
  • the DMRSs transmitted by each layer are orthogonal to each other.
  • DMRS is generally used to support beamforming and precoding techniques, and thus is only transmitted on the scheduled resource blocks, and the number of transmissions is related to the number of data streams (or called the number of layers), and corresponds to the antenna ports one by one, and The number of non-physical antennas, the former being less than or equal to the latter, which are linked by layer mapping and precoding.
  • the maximum number of orthogonal data streams that can be supported by the downlink DMRS is eight, and the resource overhead in each PRB pair is 24 Re.
  • the DMRS is distributed in each PRB in the form of block pilots.
  • Each port (port) occupies 12 REs, that is, the port density is the same.
  • the sequence design of the DMRS is determined according to the density of each port, and thus its length is a fixed value.
  • the new air interface (English full name: New Radio, English abbreviation: NR) supports more diverse scenarios, and thus supports multiple patterns. For example, to adapt to different frequency bands of data transmission, the multiplexing method will have a large different.
  • the maximum DMRS of the data channel can support more than eight orthogonal data streams, such as 3gpp RAN1 #88bis conference has already supported orthogonal 12 DMRS ports.
  • the transmit and receive antennas are very low, so the MUs supported by the MU pairing have a lower MU dimension.
  • the maximum number of layers allowed for a single user is 2, and the total number of orthogonal layers is 4.
  • the 4RX terminal may exist as a baseline for the antenna dimension, and the MU dimension will change.
  • the base station In actual transmission, the base station needs to inform the terminal of its assigned layer number, DMRS port number, sequence configuration, multiplexing mode and other information. In LTE, this information is indicated by DCI.
  • DCI Downlink Control Channel
  • NR has supported multiple patterns, and there are many changes in port number, multiplexing mode, and mapping rules. The DCI indication mode of LTE will cause a lot of overhead. Therefore, how to indicate DMRS in NR is a technical problem to be solved.
  • the present application provides a demodulation reference signal indication and reception method and apparatus.
  • the orthogonal port of the CDM multiplexing that can be supported is different from that in LTE, and can support up to 12 orthogonal ports. Therefore, the LTE only informs the terminal according to one DMRS configuration information table.
  • the manner in which the number of layers to be allocated, the DMRS orthogonal port number, the sequence configuration, the multiplexing mode, and the like is no longer applicable.
  • multiple sets of DMRS configuration information are designed to match different future networks (new radio, NR). Scene DMRS transmission requirements.
  • the method for demodulating reference signal indication and reception provided by the present application includes:
  • the transmitting end determines DMRS configuration information corresponding to the current DMRS transmission scheme from the multiple sets of demodulation reference signal DMRS configuration information, and obtains DMRS indication information according to the DMRS configuration information; the each group of DMRS configuration information includes multiple DMRS configuration information; The DMRS information is sent to the receiving end; after receiving the DMRS indication information, the receiving end demodulates the auxiliary data.
  • the current DMRS transmission scheme is indicated by the indication information; the maximum number of supported orthogonal ports corresponding to different DMRS transmission schemes is different, or the corresponding DMRS pattern or the corresponding DMRS configuration type is different.
  • the maximum number of Orthogonal Ports that can be supported by the DMRS configuration information corresponding to the different DMRS transmission schemes is different.
  • the lengths of the DMRS indication information corresponding to the different DMRS transmission schemes are different.
  • the plurality of DMRS ports in the at least one DMRS configuration information belong to different code division multiple access CDM groups, wherein different CDM groups satisfy a non-quasi-co-location QCL relationship.
  • different groups of DMRS configuration information may be configured for different maximum supportable orthogonal port numbers, where the group of DMRS configuration information includes multiple DMRS configuration information; for example, the maximum supported orthogonal port number is 4
  • the MIMO scene with the number of orthogonal ports is 6, the number of orthogonal ports is 8, and the number of orthogonal ports is 12.
  • the corresponding DMRS configuration information is configured, and the DMRS configuration information is used to let the receiving end know the DMRS orthogonal port that can be used by the receiving end. Number, sequence configuration, multiplexing, etc., for correct data decoding.
  • the DMRS configuration information is configured for different DMRS patterns.
  • a DMRS pattern corresponds to a maximum supported orthogonal port number or a maximum supported orthogonal transmission layer number.
  • MIMO scenario the DMRS pattern indicates how many orthogonal orthogonal port groups are supported, and each orthogonal port group is composed of how many resource units, so configuring different DMRS configuration information for different DMRS patterns can also The receiving end knows the DMRS orthogonal port number, sequence configuration, multiplexing mode, etc. that it can use to perform correct data decoding.
  • the DMRS configuration information may be presented by a protocol agreement table, and the specific implementation form may be a downlink control information (DCI) table (table), and multiple DCI tables are at least Contains a set of different DMRS configuration information; a set of DMRS configuration information contains multiple DMRS configuration information, which is presented in a table, referred to herein as a DMRS configuration information table.
  • DCI downlink control information
  • the DMRS transmission scheme corresponding to the DMRS information is sent by high-layer signaling, for example, radio resource control (RRC) signaling, and may be bound to other configuration parameters corresponding to the scenario, such as frequency point, carrier spacing, Frame structure, etc.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the DMRS indication information can be transmitted through DCI signaling or a media access control control unit (MAC CE).
  • MAC CE media access control control unit
  • each DMRS configuration information table corresponds to a different maximum number of supportable orthogonal ports, for example, the maximum supported orthogonal port number may be at least two of ⁇ 4, 6, 8, 12 ⁇ ;
  • each DMRS configuration information table may correspond to a different DMRS pattern or a DMRS configuration type.
  • the DMRS configuration information table is configured according to a orthogonal port combination, for example, an orthogonal port combination of less than or equal to 4 layers of transport layers, and an orthogonal port of more than 4 layers of transport layers.
  • the DMRS configuration information when the DMRS configuration information is presented in the form of a DMRS configuration information table, the DMRS configuration information may be divided according to the codeword number, or may not be divided according to the number of codewords, but according to the total
  • the maximum number of orthogonal ports can be supported or divided according to the number of transmission layers at the receiving end, and the specific number can be divided according to a certain ratio.
  • the DMRS configuration information table further includes indication information of the total number of orthogonal ports, and the indication information may indicate the number of all orthogonal ports that may actually appear, or the quantized values of all orthogonal port numbers that may actually occur.
  • the quantized value of all orthogonal port numbers may be DMRS orthogonal layer number information, or DMRS antenna orthogonal port set indication information, or CDM group information of a DMRS antenna orthogonal port, or information generated according to a CDM size. It should be understood that the total number of orthogonal ports is the same as the total number of orthogonal DMRS transmission layers.
  • the CDM group information of the orthogonal port of the DMRS antenna may be a CDM group number or a CDM group number or a CDM group status information.
  • the multiple sets of DMRS configuration information may be presented by using a total information table, that is, multiple DMRS configuration information tables may be a total information table, and the one information summary table supports maximum support.
  • the number of orthogonal ports, the plurality of DMRS configuration information tables are a subset of the information summary table, and the subset selected from the information summary table may be selected according to the maximum supported orthogonal port number or the DMRS pattern or the high layer signaling.
  • the CDM group information of the orthogonal port of the DMRS antenna in the DMRS configuration information is the CDM group status information or the CDM group number or the CDM group number or the number of the CDM group.
  • the number of the CDM group is A CDM group that is occupied/scheduled (co-scheldued) in the system.
  • the DMRS configuration information in the DMRS configuration information further includes symbol information of the DMRS.
  • the range in which the DMRS configuration information can be used is configured by using RRC signaling, where the usable range is determined based on DMRS symbol information or a maximum number of DMRS symbols.
  • the range in which the DMRS configuration information can be used is bound to a parameter indicating a maximum number of DMRS symbols in the RRC control signaling RRC.
  • the downlink control information of the DMRS port scheduling has different DCI signaling lengths, or the number of DCI bits is different, or the DCI domain is different.
  • the present application provides a demodulation reference signal indication method and a receiving method, including:
  • the transmitting end generates a demodulation reference signal DMRS indication information, where the DMRS indication information is used to indicate a resource that is not used by the DMRS, and the transmitting end sends the DMRS indication information to the receiving end;
  • the DMRS indicates information to perform data demodulation on resources that are not occupied by the DMRS.
  • the receiving end needs to receive the DMRS indication information by using downlink control information or a medium access control control unit.
  • the receiving end obtains the quantized current orthogonal transmission layer number according to the received DMRS indication information, or the currently used port group state combination, or the current orthogonal transmission layer number or port group state that is not used by the current receiving end, or needs to be
  • the resource unit being silenced to obtain resources that are not occupied by the DMRS among the resources that can be used to carry the DMRS.
  • the receiving end before receiving the DMRS indication information, the receiving end further receives the DMRS transmission scheme indication information indicating the current DMRS transmission scheme; the maximum number of supported orthogonal ports corresponding to different DMRS transmission schemes is different, or corresponding The DMRS pattern or the corresponding DMRS configuration type is different.
  • the DMRS transmission scheme is embodied by the DMRS pattern or the DMRS configuration type or the maximum number of orthogonal ports that can be supported.
  • the maximum number of orthogonal ports that can be supported here is the maximum number of orthogonal ports that the transmitting end can schedule in the current frame.
  • a 12 port DMRS pattern can be used, but the current maximum port scheduling number is only 4.
  • the maximum number of orthogonal ports that can be supported is related to the scheduling of the base station, which is less than or equal to the maximum number of orthogonal ports supported by the DMRS pattern.
  • the corresponding DMRS indication information is respectively configured according to the maximum number of supported orthogonal ports.
  • the indication information is to let the receiving end know which resource units in the time-frequency resource are occupied by the DMRS of other users, and have no data of themselves. The receiving end can avoid these resource units during data demodulation to perform correct data decoding.
  • the DMRS indication information is configured for different DMRS patterns, and may also be configured corresponding to the number of DMRS port groups in the DMRS pattern (for example, there may be two tables corresponding to two DMRS patterns respectively) Or 3 DMRS port groups.).
  • a DMRS pattern corresponds to a MU-MIMO scenario that supports the maximum number of orthogonal ports that can be supported.
  • the DMRS pattern indicates how many orthogonal CDM port groups it supports, and how many ports each port group consists of.
  • the resource unit is composed, so different indication information is configured for different DMRS patterns.
  • the indication information may also be configured for a DMRS configuration type.
  • the receiving end can know that in the time-frequency resource, which resource units are occupied by the DMRS of other users, the receiving end can correctly perform data demodulation.
  • the receiving end needs to receive a correspondence between the DMRS indication information that is sent by using the signaling and the resources that are not used by the DMRS in the resources that can be used to carry the DMRS.
  • the signaling referred to here is usually high layer signaling, such as RRC signaling.
  • the receiving end further stores the DMRS configuration information, that is, the correspondence between the DMRS indication information and the resources that are not used by the DMRS in the resources that can be used to carry the DMRS, in the locally stored DMRS configuration information. Can be found.
  • the DMRS configuration information in the embodiment of the present application further includes indication information of the total number of orthogonal ports, where the indication information of the total orthogonal port number may indicate the number of all orthogonal ports that may actually appear, or all orthogonal ports that may actually appear.
  • the quantized value of the number is DMRS orthogonal layer number information, or DMRS antenna orthogonal port set indication information, or CDM group information of a DMRS antenna orthogonal port, or information generated according to a CDM size.
  • the CDM group information of the orthogonal port of the DMRS antenna is the number of CDM groups or the CDM group number or the CDM group status information.
  • the DMRS orthogonal layer number information is an integer multiple of the number of DMRS antenna ports in a CDM group, or an integer multiple of the number of consecutive DMRS antenna ports in a CDM group. Or the value of the serial number of the DMRS antenna port in a CDM group.
  • the DMRS layer number information may be a binned quantized DMRS layer number information.
  • the DMRS layer number may be an integer multiple of the number of DMRS antenna ports in one CDM group. For example, for a DMRS pattern with two DMRS antenna port groups, suppose port group 1 contains DMRS ports ⁇ 1, 2, 3, 4 ⁇ , and port group 2 contains DMRS ports ⁇ 5, 6, 7, 8 ⁇ . Quantified into 4 layers and 8 layers.
  • the DMRS layer number information may also be an integer multiple of the number of consecutive DMRS antenna ports in a CDM group from small to large, for example, for the CDM group ⁇ 1, 2, 5, 7 ⁇ and ⁇ 3, 4, 6, 8 ⁇ can be quantified as 2 and 4 layers.
  • the information can be used by the receiving end to identify which resource units are occupied by the DMRS of the receiving end, which resource units are occupied by the DMRSs of other receiving ends that are multiplexed by the CDM, and the remaining resource units are used to be associated with the receiving end.
  • the data transmission therefore, the receiving end performs data demodulation on the corresponding resource unit.
  • the quantized value of the orthogonal transmission layer number is used because if the number of transmission layers of the receiving end is to be indicated, for example, if the number of transmission layers ⁇ 1, 2, 3, 4 ⁇ is separately indicated, 2 bits are required for indication. And quantize the number of transmission layers ⁇ 1, 2, 3, 4 ⁇ , for example, up to the number of transmission layers 4, or down to the number of transmission layers 1, or 2 or 3 to represent the number of transmission layers. 1, 2, 3, 4 ⁇ , the quantized value indicating the number of transmission layers can be indicated by only one bit, for example, 0 is used to represent the quantized value 4 of the number of transmission layers, so that the indication overhead can be reduced.
  • the DMRS indication information in the embodiment of the present application may indicate a quantized value of the orthogonal transmission layer number, one mode is an implicit indication, and the other mode is an explicit manner.
  • the quantized value of the orthogonal transmission layer number is configured in the DMRS configuration information table, and the indication information is indicated by using DMRS indication information (value) in the DMRS configuration information table;
  • the DMRS configuration information table may be Similar in LTE, for example, Antenna ports in LTE, scrambling identity and number of layers indication, it may also include DMRS port number, port index, sequence generation At least one of information and CDM type, on the basis of which a quantized value of the number of transmission layers is added.
  • the DMRS configuration information table can be saved on both the transmitting end and the receiving end, and the transmitting end sends the indication information to the receiving end.
  • the transmitting end sends the original DCI signaling in the LTE to the receiving end (due to the LTE legacy) Signaling
  • the DCI signaling may not be named as indication information, but it may indicate a rate matching scheme.
  • the receiving end simultaneously obtains its own port information and the quantized total transmission layer of the system through the signaling, and combines the two information. , calculate the port used by other receivers. That is, the receiving end identifies which resource units are used for the DMRS transmission of the receiving end, which resource units are the DMRS transmissions for other receiving ends of the CDM multiplexing, and the remaining resource units are used for the relevant receiving end.
  • the data transmission therefore, the receiving end performs data demodulation on the corresponding resource unit.
  • the correspondence between the foregoing indication information and the quantized value of the orthogonal transmission layer number exists by being independent of the DMRS configuration information table in the LTE, that is, the quantized value indicating the information and the number of transmission layers.
  • the correspondence between the two is not implicit in the DMRS configuration information table. Therefore, in addition to the DMRS configuration information table, the transmitting end and the receiving end respectively store the mapping relationship table of the quantized values of the indication information and the number of transmission layers (or The information table can be configured by using the RRC.
  • the correspondence configuration table is independent of the DMRS configuration information table.
  • the transmitting end sends the rate configuration indication information to the receiving end by means of explicit signaling, and the receiving end sends the indication information.
  • the corresponding relationship configuration table is used to search for a quantization value of the corresponding transmission layer number, and the receiving end combines the quantized value of the transmission layer number with the DMRS configuration information table to identify which resource units are used for the present
  • the DMRS at the receiving end occupies which resource units are occupied by the DMRSs of other receiving ends that are multiplexed by the CDM, and the remaining resource units are used to be associated with the receiving end. Data transmission, therefore, the present receiving end demodulates data on the corresponding resource elements.
  • the indication information of the same value may correspond to the quantized value of the different number of transmission layers. Therefore, the correspondence between the indication information and the quantized value of the number of transmission layers may also be indicated by separate signaling.
  • the number of quantized transmission layers is indicated by the indication information, and the receiving end receives two signalings, one is DMRS DCI signaling in LTE, and one is used to transmit current quantization.
  • the indication of the number of transmission layers (which may also be referred to herein as rate matching signaling).
  • the foregoing DMRS indication information when the foregoing DMRS indication information is sent to the receiving end, it may be sent in an independent signaling manner, or may be carried in the downlink signaling.
  • the downlink control information is sent in the DCI, which is not limited herein.
  • the DMRS indication information is determined by the number of codewords to be sent. For example, if one codeword triggers signaling to send DMRS indication information, two codewords do not send the signaling. The reason is that there are SU and MU scenarios in one codeword, but the two codewords must be SU scenes.
  • the transmitting end for example, the base station communicates with only one receiving end (terminal), and only the terminal is transmitted in the time-frequency resource.
  • Information RS, control signaling, data, etc.
  • the terminal can directly know the RE position of its own DMRS according to its own information (such as its own port, layer number, etc.), and avoid these REs during data decoding. Therefore, there is no rate matching problem of DMRS at SU time.
  • a second aspect of the embodiments of the present application further provides a DMRS rate matching indication and receiving method, including:
  • each TRP is silently transmitted after the resource unit corresponding to the DMRS of the QCL group used by itself, and one TRP may have one or more DMRSs of the QCL group;
  • Behavior can be the default action;
  • the transmitting end needs to send the DMRS indication information to the receiving end, where the DMRS indication information indicates the resource unit corresponding to the DMRS in the one or more QCL groups used by the transmitting end.
  • the transmitting end notifies the receiving end that there are also two ways:
  • the transmitting end sends the DMRS indication information to the receiving end.
  • the DMRS indication information indicates the current quantized transmission layer number in the available DMRS port of the TRP, or the current system cooperation in the 1PDCCH scenario. The total number of layers that the TRP can use.
  • the receiving end can use the DMRS configuration information table corresponding to the DMRS indication information corresponding to the DMRS pattern to perform rate matching.
  • the DMRS pattern herein refers to the The DMRS pattern formed by the DMRS ports in the QCL group that the TRP can use. Or a DMRS pattern formed by multiple QCL group DMRS ports that the cooperative TRP can use in the 1 PDCCH scenario.
  • the multiple DMRS configuration information table may also be a total information table, where the total information table supports the maximum number of ports, and multiple DMRS configuration information tables are a subset of the information summary table.
  • the selected subset of the information summary table can be selected according to the maximum supported port number or DMRS pattern or high layer signaling.
  • the DMRS antenna port set information refers to the status of the occupied DMRS antenna port group according to the actual DMRS layer scheduled by the current system. For example, port group 1 is ⁇ 1, 2, 3, 4 ⁇ , and port group 2 is ⁇ 5, 6, 7, 8 ⁇ . It is assumed that the base station schedules according to the DMRS port number from small to large. When the number of scheduling layers is 4 layers, Indicates that port group 1 is occupied. When it is greater than 4 layers, it indicates that port groups 1 and 2 are occupied. Only examples are given here, and the specific port number grouping and base station scheduling are not limited.
  • the code division multiplexing CDM group information includes a CDM port group that is not a DMRS antenna port used by the receiving end itself.
  • the DMRS CDM port group information that is not used by itself may include at least one of the following states:
  • All DMRS RE locations can transmit data (SU);
  • All DMRS RE locations are occupied (MU).
  • the receiver uses 1 (or 2) DMRS port CDM groups, and 2 (or 1) are occupied, or the receiver uses 2 DMRS ports. CDM group, and the other one is occupied.
  • Mute is the larger of the two port groups of the receiving end (the MU, the UE uses one port group);
  • the Mute is not the smaller of the two port groups of the receiving end (the MU, the UE uses one port group);
  • the DMRS CDM port group information that is not used by itself may be bound to the DMRS type (DMRS configuration/Type 1/A or 2/B) or to the number of CDM groups included in the pattern (2 or 3).
  • This way of indicating the status of the DMRS port group used by the non-receiving end can further reduce the instruction overhead, and this method can also support multiple scenarios, and the versatility is good.
  • 1 PDCCH NC-JT, dynamic TDD; 2 PDCCH NC-JT can be directly supported, and there are fewer changes to existing instructions.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a transmitting end, where the transmitting end includes:
  • the transmitting end determines, according to the DMRS configuration information of the multiple sets of demodulation reference signals, DMRS configuration information corresponding to the current DMRS transmission scheme, and obtains DMRS indication information according to the DMRS configuration information; the each group of DMRS configuration information includes multiple DMRS configurations. Information; a transceiver that transmits the DMRS indication information.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a transmitting end, including:
  • the processor generates a demodulation reference signal DMRS indication information, where the DMRS indication information corresponds to a maximum supportable port number or a DMRS pattern, or a DMRS configuration type;
  • the transceiver sends the DMRS indication information.
  • the application provides a receiving end, including:
  • the transceiver receives the demodulation reference signal DMRS indication information sent by the transmitting end, where the DMRS indication information is obtained by the transmitting end according to the DMRS configuration information, where the DMRS configuration information is used by the transmitting end to demodulate from multiple groups according to the current DMRS transmission scheme.
  • the signal DMRS configuration information is determined; the each group of DMRS configuration information includes multiple pieces of DMRS configuration information;
  • the processor obtains DMRS configuration information according to the DMRS indication information received by the transceiver and assists in demodulating the data.
  • the application provides another transmitting end, including:
  • the processor generates a demodulation reference signal DMRS indication information, where the DMRS indication information is used to indicate a resource that is not used by the DMRS, which is used to carry the DMRS;
  • the transceiver sends the DMRS indication information.
  • the application provides another receiving end, including:
  • a transceiver configured to receive a demodulation reference signal DMRS indication information, where the DMRS indication information is used to indicate a resource that is not used by the DMRS among resources that can be used to carry the DMRS;
  • a processor configured to perform data demodulation on a resource that is not occupied by the DMRS according to the DMRS indication information.
  • the device When the device is applied to the uplink transmission scenario, the device may be a terminal. When the device is applied to the downlink transmission scenario, the device may be a network device, and the network device may be a base station or a control node.
  • Such network side devices may include improved systems and devices as peer devices in conventional wireless telecommunications systems.
  • Such advanced or next generation devices may be included in an evolved wireless communication standard such as Long Term Evolution (LTE).
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a base station, which has a function of realizing the behavior of the base station in the actual method.
  • the functions may be implemented by hardware or by corresponding software implemented by hardware.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
  • the structure of the base station includes a processor and a transceiver configured to support the base station to perform the corresponding functions in the above methods.
  • the transceiver is configured to support communication between the base station and the terminal, and send information or signaling involved in the foregoing method to the terminal, and receive information or instructions sent by the base station.
  • the base station can also include a memory for coupling with the processor that stores the necessary program instructions and data for the base station.
  • the device When applied to an uplink transmission scenario, the device may be a network device; when applied to a downlink transmission scenario, the device is a terminal, and the terminal has a function of implementing terminal behavior in the design of the foregoing method.
  • the function can be implemented by hardware, and the structure of the terminal includes a transceiver and a processor.
  • the corresponding software implementation can also be performed by hardware.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
  • the modules can be software and/or hardware.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a processing apparatus, including a processor and an interface;
  • the processor is a processor in the foregoing transmitting end or receiving end;
  • the processing device may be a chip, and the processor may be implemented by hardware or by software.
  • the processor may be a logic circuit, an integrated circuit, etc.; when implemented by software,
  • the processor can be a general purpose processor, which is implemented by reading software code stored in a memory.
  • the memory can be integrated in the processor and can exist independently of the processor.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, where the system includes the base station and the terminal in the foregoing aspect.
  • the control node in the above embodiment may also be included.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium for storing computer software instructions used by the base station, which includes a program designed to perform the above aspects.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium for storing computer software instructions used by the terminal, which includes a program designed to execute the above aspects.
  • the method and apparatus for transmitting a demodulation reference signal and the method and apparatus for obtaining a demodulation reference signal provided by the present application, and matching multiple scenes of the NR through multiple DMRS configuration information, can meet the requirements of higher layer data transmission.
  • the plurality of information tables support switching, which can further reduce the indication overhead.
  • a first aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a data sending method, where the method is used to send multiple data streams to a receiving end device through multiple demodulation reference signal DMRS ports, where the multiple DMRS ports belong to At least two port groups, each of the DMRS ports in each port group meets a quasi-co-located QCL relationship, and any DMRS port in each port group satisfies non-pre-shared with any of the other port groups. a non-QCL relationship; the plurality of DMRS ports are allocated to at least two transmitting end devices, and the DMRS ports allocated by each transmitting end device belong to the same port group, and the method includes:
  • each transmitting end device maps one codeword to a data stream corresponding to the DMRS port to which the transmitting end device is allocated;
  • Each transmitting device sends a data stream corresponding to the DMRS port to which the transmitting device is allocated to the receiving device.
  • the at least two transmitting end devices are at least two antenna panels of the same transmitting end device
  • Each of the transmitting end devices maps one codeword to a data stream corresponding to the DMRS port to which the transmitting end device is allocated. Specifically, for each antenna panel, the same transmitting end device maps a codeword to the antenna panel to be allocated to the antenna panel. Data stream corresponding to the DMRS port;
  • the method further includes: the at least two transmitting ends A transmitting device in the device sends an indication information to the receiving device, where the indication information is used to indicate the multiple DMRS ports allocated to the receiving device.
  • the method further includes: the same transmitting device
  • the receiving end device sends an indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate the multiple DMRS ports allocated to the receiving end device.
  • the number of the plurality of data streams (that is, the number of the plurality of DMRS ports) is less than or equal to 4, but may not be limited thereto.
  • the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present invention may be applied to a scenario in which the number of data streams is less than or equal to 4, and is not applied to a scenario in which the number of data streams is greater than 4.
  • the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present invention may be applied to a scenario in which the number of data streams is 3 and/or 4 (ie, the number of the multiple data streams). It is 3 and/or 4), and is not applied to the scene in which the number of the plurality of data streams is 2.
  • the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present invention may also be not limited by the foregoing scenario.
  • a data receiving method including:
  • the receiving end device For each of the at least two port groups, the receiving end device recovers a codeword according to a data flow corresponding to the DMRS port in the port group of the plurality of DMRS ports.
  • the method before receiving the plurality of data streams, the method further includes:
  • the indication information is used to indicate the multiple DMRS ports.
  • the number of the plurality of data streams (that is, the number of the plurality of DMRS ports) is less than or equal to 4, but may not be limited thereto.
  • the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present invention may be applied to a scenario in which the number of data streams is less than or equal to 4, and is not applied to a scenario in which the number of data streams is greater than 4.
  • the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present invention may be applied to a scenario in which the number of data streams is 3 and/or 4 (ie, the number of the multiple data streams). It is 3 and/or 4), and is not applied to the scene in which the number of the plurality of data streams is 2.
  • the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present invention may also be not limited by the foregoing scenario.
  • a data receiving method including:
  • a codeword is recovered according to the plurality of data streams.
  • the method before receiving the plurality of data streams, the method further includes:
  • the indication information is used to indicate the multiple DMRS ports.
  • the number of the plurality of data streams is less than or equal to four.
  • the indication information is downlink control information DCI.
  • the above data stream is also called the data layer.
  • a transmitting end device is configured to send, by using at least one other transmitting end device, a plurality of data to a receiving end device through a plurality of demodulation reference signals DMRS ports.
  • the plurality of DMRS ports belong to at least two port groups, and each of the DMRS ports in each port group meets a quasi-co-located QCL relationship, and any DMRS port and any other port in each port group Any DMRS port in the group satisfies a non-quasi-co-located Non-QCL relationship; the plurality of DMRS ports are assigned to the transmitting end device and the at least one other transmitting end device, the transmitting end device and the at least A DMRS port to which each of the other transmitting devices belongs to belong to the same port group, and the transmitting device includes:
  • mapping module configured to map a codeword to a data flow corresponding to the DMRS port to which the transmitting device is allocated
  • a transmitting module configured to send, to the receiving end device, a data stream corresponding to the DMRS port to which the transmitting device is allocated.
  • the transmitting end device and the at least one other transmitting end device are at least two antenna panels of the same transmitting end device
  • the mapping module is configured to be in the same transmitting end device, and the mapping module is specifically configured to, for each antenna panel, map one codeword to a data stream corresponding to the DMRS port to which the antenna panel is allocated;
  • the transmitting module is disposed in the same transmitting end device, and the transmitting module is specifically configured to send, by each antenna panel, a data stream corresponding to the DMRS port to which the antenna panel is allocated, to the receiving end device.
  • the transmitting module is further configured to send, to the receiving end device, an indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate the multiple DMRS ports allocated to the receiving end device.
  • the number of the plurality of data streams is less than or equal to four.
  • a receiving end device including:
  • a receiving module configured to receive multiple data streams through multiple DMRS ports, where the multiple DMRS ports belong to at least two port groups, and each of the DMRS ports in each port group meets a quasi-co-located QCL relationship. Any DMRS port in each port group satisfies a non-quasi-co-location Non-QCL relationship with any of the other port groups;
  • a recovery module configured to recover, for each port group of the at least two port groups, a codeword according to a data flow corresponding to the DMRS port in the port group of the plurality of DMRS ports.
  • the receiving module is further configured to receive an indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate the multiple DMRS ports.
  • the number of the plurality of data streams is less than or equal to four.
  • a receiving end device including:
  • a receiving module configured to receive multiple data streams through multiple DMRS ports, where the multiple DMRS ports belong to the same port group, and each of the DMRS ports in the port group meets a quasi-co-located QCL relationship;
  • a recovery module configured to recover a codeword according to the multiple data streams.
  • the receiving module is further configured to receive an indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate the multiple DMRS ports.
  • the number of the plurality of data streams is less than or equal to four.
  • the indication information may be downlink control information DCI.
  • a data transmitting method for transmitting a plurality of data streams to a receiving end device by using a plurality of demodulation reference signal DMRS ports, wherein the plurality of DMRS ports are divided into It belongs to at least two port groups, and each of the DMRS ports in each port group satisfies a quasi-co-located QCL relationship, and any DMRS port in each port group and any other port group meets the non-standard Co-locating a Non-QCL relationship; the plurality of DMRS ports are assigned to the same transmitting device, and for each port group, the method includes:
  • the transmitting end device maps a codeword to a data flow corresponding to the DMRS port in the port group of the plurality of DMRS ports;
  • the transmitting end device sends the data stream to the receiving end device.
  • the method further includes: the transmitting end device sending an indication information to the receiving end device, where the indication information is used to indicate the multiple DMRSs allocated to the receiving end device port.
  • the number of the plurality of data streams is less than or equal to four.
  • a transmitting end device is configured to send, by using a plurality of demodulation reference signals DMRS ports, a plurality of data streams to a receiving end device, where the multiple DMRSs
  • the port belongs to at least two port groups, and each DMRS port in each port group satisfies a quasi-co-located QCL relationship, and any DMRS port in each port group satisfies any one of the other port groups.
  • a non-quasi-co-located Non-QCL relationship the plurality of DMRS ports are allocated to the transmitting device, and the transmitting device includes:
  • mapping module configured to map, for each port group, a codeword to a data stream corresponding to a DMRS port in the port group of the plurality of DMRS ports;
  • a transmitting module configured to send the data stream to the receiving end device.
  • the method further includes: the transmitting module is further configured to send, to the receiving end device, an indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate the multiple allocated to the receiving end device DMRS ports.
  • the number of the plurality of data streams is less than or equal to four.
  • the embodiment of the present invention provides a data sending method, where the method is used to send multiple data streams to a receiving end device through multiple demodulation reference signal DMRS ports, where the multiple DMRS ports belong to a plurality of data streams.
  • At least two port groups each of the DMRS ports in each port group meets a quasi-co-located QCL relationship, and any DMRS port in each port group satisfies non-pre-shared with any of the other port groups.
  • Address Non-QCL relationship, for each port group the method includes:
  • the method further includes: sending, to the receiving end device, an indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate the multiple DMRS ports allocated to the receiving end device.
  • the number of the plurality of data streams is less than or equal to four.
  • the multiple DMRS ports may be allocated to the same transmitting device; or may be allocated to multiple antenna panels of the same transmitting device, where the DMRS ports allocated to each antenna panel belong to the same port group; It can also be assigned to multiple transmitter devices that serve the same receiving device (for example, CoMP (Coordinated Multi-Point) related technology), and the DMRS ports allocated to each transmitting device belong to the same port group.
  • the foregoing DMRS port may also be allocated to one or more transmitting devices in other manners, such as, but not limited to, various feasible combinations of the foregoing manners.
  • an embodiment of the present invention further provides a data receiving method, including:
  • the receiving end device For each of the same port group or at least two port groups, the receiving end device recovers a codeword according to the data flow corresponding to the DMRS port in the port group of the multiple DMRS ports.
  • the method before receiving the plurality of data streams, the method further includes:
  • the indication information is used to indicate the multiple DMRS ports.
  • the number of the plurality of data streams is less than or equal to four.
  • the receiving device can not care whether the above multiple DMRS ports are from one transmitting device, multiple antenna panels from one transmitting device, or multiple transmitting devices.
  • QCL Quadrature-Co-Location
  • Similar spatial directions such as but not limited to beam direction, etc.
  • non-quasi-co-location Non-Quasi-Co-Location
  • Non-QCL Non-quasi-co-location
  • Related content about QCL and Non-QCL has been clearly described in the prior art, and therefore will not be described here.
  • the information bits are usually divided in the form of a Transport Block (TB), and one transport block can be a codeword (CW).
  • TB Transport Block
  • CW codeword
  • the contents of the TB and CW can be referred to. current technology
  • the DMRS port supported by the system can be divided into multiple port groups, and each DMRS port in each port group satisfies the QCL relationship, and any DMRS port in each port group and any other port group A DMRS port satisfies the Non-QCL relationship.
  • the DMRS ports allocated for each transmitting device are from the same port group.
  • DMRS ports 0 to 9 can be divided into two port groups, namely port group 1 and port group 2, where DMRS ports 0 to 4 belong to port group 1, and DMRS ports 5 to 9 belong to port group 2.
  • any number of DMRS ports in the port group 1 may be allocated to the transmitting device, or any number of DMRS ports in the port group 2 may be allocated to the transmitting device.
  • the DMRS ports allocated to the same transmitter device may be from the same port group or different from each other.
  • Port group For example, when from the same port group, port 1 and port 2 in the above port group 1 can be assigned to the transmitting device; when from different port groups, ports 2 to 3 in the port group 1 can be used. And the ports 8 to 9 in the above port group 2 are allocated to the transmitting device.
  • the wireless transmission of the transmitting device through the DMRS ports in different port groups will have Non-QCL characteristics, for example, having different large scales. Decline, or point to different spatial directions.
  • the wireless transmission by the transmitting device through the DMRS port in the same port group will have QCL characteristics, such as having similar large-scale fading, or pointing Similar spatial direction.
  • the device may be set in advance, or the DMRS port may be used by the transmitting device.
  • the packet is notified to the receiving device in advance, for example, but not limited to, the transmitting device accesses the communication network through RRC (Radio Resource Control) message, for example, but not limited to, the receiving device accesses the device, or periodically, notifies the receiving end. device.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the DMRS port can be allocated to the transmitting device according to the grouping situation and specific needs (for example, various application scenarios, such as CoMP).
  • Multiple transmitter devices may be multiple transmitter devices or multiple antenna panels of the same transmitter device.
  • the above transmitting device may be, for example but not limited to, a base station.
  • the above receiving device may be, for example but not limited to, a terminal.
  • the foregoing indication information may be sent by one of the plurality of transmitting end devices, in which case the transmitting end device transmitting the indication information may be called For service devices, other transmitter devices may be referred to as collaboration devices.
  • the above data stream can also be referred to as a data layer, which can usually be obtained by layer mapping a codeword.
  • the specific process can refer to the prior art.
  • the steps in the above methods may be performed by one or more processors, and executed by one or more processors.
  • the functions of the respective modules in the above-mentioned transmitting end device and receiving end device may be integrated on one or more processors for execution, or may be executed by one or more processors executing programs.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a pilot map provided by the prior art
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a resource unit according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a system architecture applicable to the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a base station according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of interaction between a DMRS indication and reception method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a DMRS pattern according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of still another DMRS pattern provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of still another DMRS pattern provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of still another DMRS pattern provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of still another DMRS pattern according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of still another DMRS pattern according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of still another DMRS pattern according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of still another DMRS pattern according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of still another DMRS pattern according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of still another DMRS pattern according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of still another DMRS pattern according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of still another DMRS pattern according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of still another DMRS pattern according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 20 is a schematic diagram of a MU-MIMO scenario in an LTE system
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of still another interaction process of a DMRS indication method and a receiving method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of a DMRS indication method and a receiving method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram of indication information corresponding to a pattern in a DMRS indication method and a receiving method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 24 is still another schematic diagram of a DMRS indication method and a receiving method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 25 is still another schematic diagram of the indication information corresponding to the pattern in the DMRS indication method and the receiving method according to the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 26 is still another schematic diagram of a DMRS indication method and a receiving method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 27 is still another schematic diagram of indication information corresponding to a pattern in a DMRS indication method and a receiving method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 28 is still another schematic diagram of a DMRS indication method and a receiving method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 29 is still another schematic diagram of the indication information corresponding to the pattern in the DMRS indication method and the receiving method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 30 is still another schematic diagram of the indication information corresponding to the pattern in the DMRS indication method and the receiving method according to the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 31 is still another schematic diagram of indication information corresponding to pattern in a DMRS indication method and a receiving method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 32 is still another schematic diagram of the indication information corresponding to the pattern in the DMRS indication method and the receiving method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 33 is still another schematic diagram of the indication information corresponding to the pattern in the DMRS indication method and the receiving method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 34 is still another schematic diagram of indication information corresponding to a pattern in a DMRS indication method and a receiving method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram of still another application scenario in a DMRS indication method and a receiving method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 36 is still another schematic diagram of the indication information corresponding to the pattern in the DMRS indication method and the receiving method according to the embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 37 is still another schematic diagram of indication information corresponding to pattern in a DMRS indication method and a receiving method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of a DMRS indication method and a receiving method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 39 is still another schematic diagram of the indication information corresponding to the pattern in the DMRS indication method and the receiving method according to the embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 40 is still another schematic diagram of indication information corresponding to pattern in a DMRS indication method and a receiving method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 41 is a schematic diagram of a module of a transmitting end according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 42 is a schematic diagram of a module of a receiving end according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 43 is a schematic diagram of a transmitting end or a receiving end according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • resource unit (resource unit)
  • a resource unit is provided, which can be used as a basic unit for scheduling resource allocation, and can also be used to describe multiple The arrangement of the reference signals.
  • the resource unit may be composed of a plurality of consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain and a time interval (TI) in the time domain.
  • TI time interval
  • the TI here may be a transmission time interval (TTI) in the LTE system, or may be a short TTI at the symbol level, or a short TTI at a large subcarrier interval in the high frequency system, or may be in a 5G system. Slot or mini-slot, etc. This application does not limit this.
  • one resource unit may include one or more RBs, one or more RB pairs, and the like, and may also be a half RB or the like.
  • other time-frequency resources may also be used, which is not limited in this application.
  • the RB pair is composed of 12 consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain and one subframe in the time domain.
  • a time-frequency resource composed of one subcarrier in the frequency domain and one symbol in the time domain is a resource element (RE), as shown in FIG. 2.
  • the RB pair in FIG. 2 is composed of 12 consecutive subcarriers (numbered from 0 to 11) in the frequency domain and 14 symbols (numbered from 0 to 13) in the time domain.
  • the abscissa represents the time domain and the ordinate represents the frequency domain.
  • symbols in the present application may include, but is not limited to, any of the following: orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols, universal filtered multi-carrier (UFMC) Signal, filter-band multi-carrier (FBMC) symbols, generalized frequency-division multiplexing (GFDM) symbols, and the like.
  • OFDM orthogonal frequency division multiplexing
  • UMC universal filtered multi-carrier
  • FBMC filter-band multi-carrier
  • GFDM generalized frequency-division multiplexing
  • the "DMRS port group” referred to in the present application is a logical concept introduced to clearly describe the technical solution provided by the present application, and specifically, is introduced to clearly describe the pilot map provided in the present application or a variant thereof.
  • a logical concept It can be understood that, in actual implementation, the base station and the terminal may not perform the action of grouping the DMRS port, and designing the pilot map as described in the present application or a modification thereof in any manner should be within the protection scope of the present application. .
  • a DMRS port group can include one or more DMRS ports.
  • the same time-frequency resources such as an orthogonal cover code (OCC) and a cyclic shift (CS)
  • OCC orthogonal cover code
  • CS cyclic shift
  • a method such as cyclic phase rotations, or a combination of the above methods, such as OCC+CS.
  • the DMRS port supported by the system can be considered as the DMRS port that the base station can use.
  • the base station may schedule the terminal using some or all of the DMRS ports it supports.
  • the maximum number of orthogonal ports that can be supported that is, the maximum number of DMRS orthogonal ports that the system or base station can support.
  • the number of DMRS ports supported by the system is 4, 6, 8, and 12 as an example.
  • first the terms “first”, “second”, etc. are used herein to distinguish different objects and are not intended to limit the order.
  • first symbol group and the second symbol group are merely for distinguishing different symbol groups, and their order is not limited.
  • the technical solutions provided by the present application can be applied to various communication systems, such as current 2G, 3G, 4G communication systems, and future evolution networks, such as 5G communication systems.
  • the LTE system the 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) related cellular system, etc., and other such communication systems.
  • 3GPP 3rd generation partnership project
  • it can be applied to a 5G NR system.
  • the 5G standard may include machine to machine (M2M), device to machine (D2M), macro communication, enhanced mobile broadband (eMBB), super high. Scenarios such as reliability and ultra-low latency communication (uRLLC) and massive machine type communication (mMTC). These scenarios may include, but are not limited to, communication scenarios between terminals and terminals. a communication scenario between the base station and the base station, a communication scenario between the base station and the terminal, and the like. The technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application can also be applied to a scenario between a terminal and a terminal in a 5G communication system, or a communication between a base station and a base station.
  • M2M machine to machine
  • D2M device to machine
  • eMBB enhanced mobile broadband
  • uRLLC ultra-low latency communication
  • mMTC massive machine type communication
  • the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application may be applied to a system architecture as shown in FIG. 3, where the system architecture may include a base station 100 and one or more terminals 200 connected to the base station 100.
  • base station 100 can be implemented by a structure as shown in FIG.
  • the base station 100 may be a device that can communicate with the terminal 200.
  • the base station 100 can be a relay station or an access point or the like.
  • the base station 100 may be a base transceiver station (BTS) in a global system for mobile communication (GSM) or a code division multiple access (CDMA) network, or may be a wideband code.
  • the NB (NodeB) in the wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA) may also be an eNB or an eNodeB (evolutional NodeB) in LTE.
  • the base station 100 may also be a wireless controller in a cloud radio access network (CRAN) scenario.
  • the base station 100 may also be a network device in a future 5G network or a network device in a future evolved PLMN network; it may also be a wearable device or an in-vehicle device.
  • the terminal 200 may be a user equipment (UE), an access terminal, a UE unit, a UE station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, a UE terminal, a terminal, a wireless communication device, a UE proxy, or UE device, etc.
  • the access terminal may be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (PDA), with wireless communication.
  • the base station 100 may include an indoor baseband unit (BBU) and a remote radio unit (RRU), and the RRU and the antenna feeder system (ie, an antenna) are connected.
  • BBU indoor baseband unit
  • RRU remote radio unit
  • the BBU and the RRU may be as needed. Take it apart.
  • the base station 100 may also adopt other general hardware architectures, and is not limited to the general hardware architecture shown in FIG.
  • the mobile phone may include: a radio frequency (RF) circuit 110, a memory 120, other input devices 130, a display screen 140, a sensor 150, an audio circuit 160, an I/O subsystem 170, a processor 180, And components such as power supply 190.
  • RF radio frequency
  • FIG. 5 the structure of the mobile phone shown in FIG. 5 does not constitute a limitation on the mobile phone, and may include more or less components than those illustrated, or combine some components, or split some components, or Different parts are arranged.
  • the display screen 140 belongs to a user interface (UI), and the display screen 140 can include a display panel 141 and a touch panel 142.
  • the handset can include more or fewer components than shown.
  • the mobile phone may also include functional modules or devices such as a camera and a Bluetooth module, and details are not described herein.
  • the processor 180 is connected to the RF circuit 110, the memory 120, the audio circuit 160, the I/O subsystem 170, and the power supply 190, respectively.
  • the I/O subsystem 170 is connected to other input devices 130, display 140, and sensor 150, respectively.
  • the RF circuit 110 can be used for receiving and transmitting signals during and after receiving or transmitting information, and in particular, receiving downlink information of the base station and processing it to the processor 180.
  • Memory 120 can be used to store software programs and modules.
  • the processor 180 executes various functional applications and data processing of the mobile phone by running software programs and modules stored in the memory 120.
  • Other input devices 130 can be used to receive input numeric or character information, as well as to generate key signal inputs related to user settings and function controls of the handset.
  • the display screen 140 can be used to display information input by the user or information provided to the user as well as various menus of the mobile phone, and can also accept user input.
  • Sensor 150 can be a light sensor, a motion sensor, or other sensor.
  • the audio circuit 160 can provide an audio interface between the user and the handset.
  • the I/O subsystem 170 is used to control external devices for input and output, and the external devices may include other device input controllers, sensor controllers, and display controllers.
  • the processor 180 is the control center of the handset 200, which connects various portions of the entire handset using various interfaces and lines, by running or executing software programs and/or modules stored in the memory 120, and recalling data stored in the memory 120, The various functions and processing data of the mobile phone 200 are executed to perform overall monitoring of the mobile phone.
  • a power source 190 (such as a battery) is used to power the various components described above.
  • the power source can be logically coupled to the processor 180 through a power management system to manage functions such as charging, discharging, and power consumption through the power management system.
  • the technical solution provided by the present application can be used in a single-carrier transmission scenario, and can also be used in a multi-carrier transmission scenario, and can also be applied to multiple waveform hybrid transmission scenarios; it can be applied to an uplink transmission scenario or a downlink transmission scenario. Scenes in the scene, or both upstream and downstream.
  • the method for transmitting a DMRS may include a method for transmitting a DMRS by a transmitting end, and a method for acquiring a DMRS by a receiving end.
  • a method for transmitting a DMRS is provided by the present application.
  • the method can include:
  • the transmitting end determines DMRS configuration information corresponding to the current DMRS transmission scheme from the DMRS configuration information of the multiple sets of demodulation reference signals, and obtains DMRS indication information according to the DMRS configuration information; the each DMRS configuration information includes multiple DMRS configuration information. .
  • the multiple DMRS configuration information may be presented in the form of a DMRS configuration information table, and one manner is presented in the form of multiple independent tables, or may belong to a subset of a total information table.
  • the transmitting end sends the DMRS indication information by using a time-frequency resource.
  • the receiving end receives the DMRS indication information.
  • S104 The receiving end performs channel estimation or auxiliary demodulation data according to the received DMRS indication information.
  • the time-frequency resource for carrying the DMRS may include one or more symbols in the time domain, and may include one or more sub-carriers in the frequency domain.
  • the transmitting end may be a terminal, and the receiving end may be a base station. If the technical solution is applied to a downlink transmission scenario, the transmitting end may be a base station, and the receiving end may be a terminal.
  • the current DMRS transmission scheme is indicated by the indication information; the maximum number of supported orthogonal ports corresponding to different DMRS transmission schemes is different, or the corresponding DMRS pattern or the corresponding DMRS configuration type is different.
  • the maximum number of supportable orthogonal ports in the DMRS configuration information corresponding to the different DMRS transmission schemes is different.
  • the lengths of the DMRS indication information corresponding to the different DMRS transmission schemes are different.
  • the plurality of DMRS ports in the at least one DMRS configuration information belong to different code division multiple access CDM groups, wherein different CDM groups satisfy a non-quasi-co-location QCL relationship.
  • Different DMRS configuration information can be configured for different maximum supported orthogonal port numbers.
  • the maximum number of supported orthogonal ports is 4, the number of orthogonal ports is 6, the number of orthogonal ports is 8, and the number of orthogonal ports is
  • the corresponding DMRS configuration information is respectively configured, and the DMRS configuration information is used to let the receiving end know the DMRS orthogonal port number, sequence configuration, multiplexing mode, etc., which can be used for correct data decoding.
  • the DMRS configuration information is configured for different DMRS patterns.
  • a DMRS pattern corresponds to a maximum supported orthogonal port number or a maximum supported orthogonal transmission layer number.
  • MIMO scenario the DMRS pattern indicates how many orthogonal orthogonal port groups are supported, and each orthogonal port group is composed of how many resource units, so configuring different DMRS configuration information for different DMRS patterns can also The receiving end knows the DMRS orthogonal port number, sequence configuration, multiplexing mode, etc. that it can use to perform correct data decoding.
  • the DMRS configuration information may be presented by a protocol agreement table, and the specific implementation form may be a downlink control information (DCI) table (table), and multiple DCI tables are at least Having a different DMRS configuration information; the DMRS transmission scheme corresponding to the DMRS configuration information is sent by high layer signaling, for example, radio resource control (RRC) signaling, and of course, other configuration parameters corresponding to the scenario. Binding, such as frequency points, carrier spacing, frame structure, etc.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • Binding such as frequency points, carrier spacing, frame structure, etc.
  • the DMRS indication information can be transmitted through DCI signaling or a media access control control unit (MAC CE).
  • MAC CE media access control control unit
  • each DMRS configuration information table corresponds to a different maximum number of supportable orthogonal ports, for example, the maximum supported orthogonal port number may be at least two of ⁇ 4, 6, 8, 12 ⁇ ;
  • each DMRS configuration information table may correspond to a different DMRS pattern or a DMRS configuration type.
  • the information table is configured according to a orthogonal port combination, for example, an orthogonal port combination of less than or equal to four layers of transport layers, and an orthogonal port combination of more than four layers of transport layers.
  • the DMRS configuration information when the DMRS configuration information is presented in the form of a DMRS configuration information table, the DMRS configuration information may be divided according to the codeword number, or may not be divided according to the number of codewords, but according to the total
  • the maximum number of orthogonal ports can be supported or divided according to the number of transmission layers at the receiving end, and the specific number can be divided according to a certain ratio.
  • the DMRS configuration information further includes indication information of the total number of orthogonal ports, where the indication information may indicate the number of all orthogonal ports that may actually occur, or the quantized values of all orthogonal port numbers that may actually occur.
  • the quantized value of all orthogonal port numbers may be DMRS orthogonal layer number information, or DMRS antenna orthogonal port set indication information, or CDM group information of a DMRS antenna orthogonal port, or information generated according to a CDM size. It should be understood that the total number of orthogonal ports is the same as the total number of orthogonal DMRS transmission layers.
  • the reason why the quantization value of the DMRS orthogonal transmission layer number is used is that if the specific orthogonal transmission layer number of the receiving end is to be indicated, for example, the number of orthogonal transmission layers is indicated ⁇ 1, 2, 3, 4 ⁇ , 4 bits are required. Instructing, and quantizing the number of orthogonal transmission layers ⁇ 1, 2, 3, 4 ⁇ into a value, for example, up-quantizing into orthogonal transmission layer number 4, or down-quantizing into orthogonal transmission layer number 1, or 2 Or 3 means that the number of orthogonal transmission layers ⁇ 1, 2, 3, 4, ⁇ indicates that the quantized value of the orthogonal transmission layer only needs one bit, and the quantization of the number of orthogonal transmission layers is represented by 0. The value is 4, so the indication overhead can be reduced.
  • the multiple DMRS configuration information table may be a total information table, where the maximum information table supports the maximum number of orthogonal ports that can be supported, and multiple DMRS configuration information tables are children of the information summary table.
  • the set, the subset selected from the information summary table can be selected according to the maximum supportable orthogonal port number or DMRS pattern or high layer signaling.
  • the multiple DMRS configuration information table may be a total information table, where the maximum information table supports the maximum number of orthogonal ports that can be supported, and multiple DMRS configuration information tables are children of the information summary table.
  • the set, the subset selected from the information summary table can be selected according to the maximum supportable orthogonal port number or DMRS pattern or high layer signaling.
  • a table of multiple DMRS configuration information is designed, which is simply referred to as a DMRS configuration information table, and each DMRS configuration information table is associated with a maximum number of supported orthogonal ports, or for different DMRS patterns, or for different DMRS configuration type, design different DMRS configuration information table; maximum support for orthogonal port number, or DMRS pattern, or DMRS configuration type can represent DMRS transmission scheme; before transmission, select according to different pattern configuration information or in different DMRS Switch between the configuration information tables.
  • the DMRS configuration information table is a DMRS configuration information table designed by a single terminal (UE) to support a maximum number of orthogonal ports of 4 in SU or MU-MIMO.
  • the port combinations listed in the table shown in Table 1 can basically cover all configurations of 4port and below, where reserved can be used for additional combination to increase scheduling flexibility, although the combined combination can meet the scheduling requirements.
  • the DMRS configuration information table shown in Table 1 is applicable to orthogonal DMRS to achieve maximum 4 stream/layer data transmission or the pattern corresponding to Figure 7 (such as the config.1 1 symbol shown in the left part or the config.1 shown in the right part) Symbol but with time domain repetition, eg, TD-OCC ⁇ (1,1),(1,1) ⁇ )
  • the DMRS configuration information table in this embodiment is designed according to the LTE table (that is, divided by the number of codewords), and the corresponding value requires a 3-bit indication overhead.
  • the port index in the DMRS configuration information table is only a representation, which is merely an example, and may be represented by other numbers according to actual needs.
  • the DMRS configuration information table is a DMRS configuration information table designed by a single terminal (UE) to support a maximum number of orthogonal ports of 6 in SU or MU-MIMO.
  • the indication information or the index of the DMRS configuration information is represented by a value.
  • the orthogonal port index here is only an example, and the specific orthogonal port number can be represented by other numbers.
  • the port combinations listed in the table shown in Table 2 can basically cover all configurations of 6port and below, where reserved can be used for additional combination to increase scheduling flexibility, although the combined combination can meet the scheduling requirements.
  • the DMRS configuration information table shown in Table 2 is applicable to orthogonal DMRS to achieve maximum 6 stream/layer data transmission or the pattern corresponding to Figure 8 (such as the config.1 1 symbol shown in the left part or the config.1 shown in the right part). 2 symbols but with time domain repetition, eg, TD-OCC ⁇ (1,1), (1,1) ⁇ ).
  • the DMRS configuration information table in this embodiment is designed according to the LTE table (that is, divided by the number of codewords), and the corresponding value requires a 4-bit indication overhead.
  • the DMRS configuration information table is a DMRS configuration information table designed by a single terminal (UE) to support a maximum number of orthogonal ports of 8 in SU or MU-MIMO.
  • the orthogonal port index is only an example, and the specific orthogonal port number can be represented by other numbers.
  • the port combinations listed in the table shown in Table 3 can basically cover all configurations of 8port and below, where reserved can be used for additional combination to increase scheduling flexibility, although the combined combination can meet the scheduling requirements.
  • the DMRS configuration information table as shown in Table 3 is suitable for orthogonal DMRS to achieve maximum 8 stream/layer data transmission or Figure 9 corresponding pattern (config. 1 2 symbol).
  • the DMRS configuration information table in this embodiment is designed according to the LTE table (that is, divided by the number of codewords), and the corresponding value requires a 4-bit indication overhead.
  • the DMRS configuration information table is a DMRS configuration information table designed by a single terminal (UE) to support a maximum number of orthogonal ports of 12 in SU-MU-MIMO.
  • the port combinations listed in the table shown in Table 4 can basically cover all configurations of 12port and below, where reserved can be used for additional combination to increase scheduling flexibility, although the combined combination can meet the scheduling requirements.
  • the DMRS configuration information table as shown in Table 4 is applicable to orthogonal DMRS to achieve maximum 12 stream/layer data transmission or pattern corresponding to FIG. 10 (config. 2 2 symbol).
  • the DMRS configuration information table in this embodiment is designed according to the LTE table (that is, divided by the number of codewords), and the corresponding value value requires an indication overhead of 5 bits.
  • the corresponding DMRS configuration information table is designed for each maximum supported orthogonal port number, which can meet the requirements of different scenarios in the NR system.
  • the pattern used in the Ultra-Reliable and Low-Latency Communication (URLLC) scenario is not only used to enhance the pattern of Enhanced Mobile Broadband (eMBB), but also for other different patterns. Rethink the design of the form.
  • URLLC Ultra-Reliable and Low-Latency Communication
  • multiple DMRS configuration information tables may be designed as DMRS pattern configuration types, which are referred to as DMRS configuration types to be configured. Different DMRS configuration information tables are selected according to different configuration type information before transmission or Switch between different information tables.
  • the configuration type is divided into two types, and the corresponding DMRS configuration information table is the same as the maximum 8 port (configuration type 1) shown in Table 3 and the maximum 12 port (configuration type 2) table shown in Table 4, and will not be described here. .
  • the DMRS configuration information table shown in Tables 1 to 4 corresponds to different DMRS patterns, or corresponds to the maximum number of supported orthogonal ports supported by the system, or different DMRS configuration types, and their corresponding patterns or maximum support.
  • the Orthogonal Port Number 4, 6, 8, 12, or DMRS configuration type can be indicated by explicit signaling such as RRC, MAC CE, or DCI, or other configuration parameters corresponding to the scenario, such as frequency and carrier spacing. , frame structure, etc.
  • the division is not based on the codeword number, but based on the maximum supported orthogonal port number according to a certain ratio. Divide or divide the number of orthogonal ports greater than a certain value and less than or equal to a certain value into two columns, or according to the number of transmission layers at the receiving end (ie, UE RANK).
  • the maximum number of supported orthogonal ports is equal to 12
  • the left column of the information table is that the number of orthogonal ports is less than or equal to 8, and the number of orthogonal ports is greater than 8.
  • Table 5 is a schematic diagram of the maximum supportable supportable orthogonal port number/2 pair information table, which is only an indication. In the embodiment of the present application, there may be other manners, such as Table 6. As shown in Table 7, the division is performed according to the number of transmission layers (RANK) of the UE. The principle is to make the number of rows of valid information in the left and right columns of the table as balanced as possible, thereby further reducing the storage overhead.
  • RTK transmission layers
  • multiple DMRS configuration information tables are integrated into one total information table, and are selected according to the maximum supported orthogonal transmission layer number or pattern or higher layer signaling, as shown in Table 8-0.
  • the maximum number of orthogonal ports supported by the DMRS configuration information table shown in Table 8-0 is 12.
  • the number of other ports, for example, the DMRS configuration information corresponding to 4, 6, and 8 are all subsets of the total information table.
  • the corresponding sub-table may be selected from the total information table according to the maximum supportable orthogonal port number or the pattern binding, or according to the indication of the high layer signaling, such as RRC signaling. For example, value0-7 corresponds to a total orthogonal port number of 4, value0-13 corresponds to a total orthogonal port number of 6, value0-19 corresponds to a total orthogonal port number of 8, and value0-28 corresponds to a total orthogonal port number of 12.
  • the NR DMRS port can be instructed to reduce overhead.
  • a plurality of DMRS configuration information tables are integrated in a general information table, and the DMRS configuration information of the same DMRS configuration type may be designed into a master table and selected by using DMRS symbol information.
  • the DMRS configuration information table may include symbol information of a Front-loaded (FL) DMRS, such as the number of DMRS symbols, where Table 8-1 corresponds to FL DMRS configuration type 1, and Table 8-2 corresponds to FL DMRS configuration. Type 2, that is, each table corresponds to a different FL DMRS type.
  • the table may also include a state of CDM group of the CDM group, and the state information of the CDM group may be used as rate matching information.
  • a column of symbol numbers in Table 8-1 and Table 8-2 corresponds to Type 1 FL DMRS of 1 symbol and 2 symbols, respectively.
  • the 1 symbol of the same FL DMRS configuration type and the DMRS port indication information of the 2 symbol FLDMRS are included in the same table, and the beneficial effect is that the DCI can be used to indicate different states in the table, thereby implementing the dynamic 1 symbol. Switching between the 2 symbolic FL DMRS.
  • the number of symbols is 1 and 2, corresponding to 1 symbol FL DMRS and 2 symbol FL DMRS, respectively.
  • the number of symbols may be represented as 0 and 1, such as 0 for 1 symbol FL DMRS, 1 for 2 symbols FL DMRS, or 1 symbol for single symbol and 2 symbol for double symbols. There may be multiple representations in the specific implementation, which are not limited in this embodiment.
  • the DMRS configuration information table may not add a symbol number column, but directly indicates an implicit indication by the value value.
  • the symbol number column can be removed, while the other elements are not changed.
  • the transmitting end can still complete the dynamic switching of the 1-symbol FL DMRS and the 2-symbol FL DMRS by indicating the value to the receiving end.
  • the receiving end and the transmitting end may pre-define that some values are corresponding to the 1-symbol FL DMRS pattern, and some values are corresponding to the 2-symbol FL DMRS pattern.
  • the value 0- may be predefined. 10 corresponds to 1 symbol FL DMRS, and value>11 corresponds to 2 symbol FL DMRS.
  • the receiving end knows that the currently called 1 symbol FL DMRS pattern or 2 symbol FL DMRS pattern is called.
  • a transmitting end such as a network side device, may only schedule a part of a table, that is, a subtable or a subset of a table, in a certain scheduling, thereby saving DCI overhead.
  • the selection of the sub-form may be explicitly configured by using RRC signaling, that is, the DMRS symbol information is indicated by RRC signaling, and the DMRS configuration type corresponding to the 1 symbol or the 2 symbol corresponding to the 1 symbol is dynamically scheduled.
  • RRC signaling that is, the DMRS symbol information is indicated by RRC signaling, and the DMRS configuration type corresponding to the 1 symbol or the 2 symbol corresponding to the 1 symbol is dynamically scheduled.
  • the signaling configuration of the RRC may be implemented in multiple manners, for example, by using independent RRC signaling, or implicitly indicating binding with other RRC signaling indicating FL DMRS information.
  • RRC For explicit indication, it can be configured through a separate RRC signaling.
  • the specific RRC configuration method is not limited herein.
  • the enabling of the sub-table can be bound to other RRC signaling, for example, can be bound to a parameter indicating the maximum number of symbols of the FL DMRS in the RRC, such as with DL-DMRS-max-len or UL- DMRS-max-len binding.
  • DL-DMRS-max-len 1
  • the maximum number of symbols representing the FL DMRS is 1, that is, the system only calls the 1 symbol FL DMRS.
  • the maximum number of symbols representing the FL DMRS is 2, that is, the system can call the 1 symbol FL DMRS pattern and the 2 symbol FL DMRS.
  • the receiving end and the transmitting end can The state corresponding to the 1 symbol and the 2 symbol FL DMRS in Table 8-2, that is, the state in the entire table can be used.
  • the maximum number of symbols of the FL DMRS is different (for example, when DL-DMRS-max-len or UL-DMRS-max-len in RRC signaling is equal to 1 or 2)
  • the corresponding DMRS port scheduling DCI signaling length is different.
  • the DCI domain is different.
  • N-JT Non-coherent Joint Transmission
  • TRPs transmission points
  • a port is selected from a group of different DMRS port groups to form a port combination.
  • the base station needs to combine these ports through a DCI indication to the scheduling UE, and the two PDCCH scenarios can combine the ports through the two.
  • the DCI is indicated to the UE.
  • the division of the DMRS port group is related to the pattern configuration and the port mapping scheme. For example, configuration type 1 may have two port mapping schemes, as shown in FIG. 11 or FIG. 12, and configuration type 2 may have three port mapping schemes, as shown in FIG. 13, FIG. 14, and FIG.
  • the above various port mapping methods are respectively obtained by performing frequency division multiplexing after port code division multiplexing, or performing frequency division multiplexing after code division multiplexing. Different port mappings will get different DMRS port packets, and the packets based on the same group code division multiplexing can only be located in the same group.
  • the DMRS packet of FIG. 11 is ⁇ (0, 2, 4, 6), (1, 3, 5, 7) ⁇ or a group of each group subset, such as ⁇ (0, 2), (1, 3) ⁇ .
  • the DMRS packet of FIG. 12 is ⁇ (0, 1, 4, 6), (2, 3, 5, 7) ⁇ or a group of each group subset.
  • the DMRS packet shown in Figure 13 is ⁇ (0,1,6,7), (2,3,4,5,8,9,10,11) ⁇ or ⁇ (0,1,6,7,4, 5,10,11),(2,3,8,9) ⁇ or ⁇ (0,1,6,7,2,3,8,9), (4,5,10,11) ⁇ or groups The grouping of subsets.
  • the DMRS packet of Figure 14 is ⁇ (0,3,6,9), (1,4,7,10,2,5,8,11) ⁇ or ⁇ (0,3,6,9,1,4, 7,10), (2,5,8,11) ⁇ or ⁇ (1,4,7,10), (0,3,6,9,2,5,8,11) ⁇ or each group subset Grouping.
  • the DMRS packet of Figure 15 is ⁇ (0,1,6,9), (2,3,7,10,4,5,8,11) ⁇ or ⁇ (0,1,6,9,4,5, 8,11), (2,3,7,10) ⁇ or ⁇ (4,5,8,11), (0,1,6,9,2,3,7,10) ⁇ or each group subset Grouping.
  • a port is selected from different groups to form a port combination, and thus different port groups form different port combinations.
  • the DMRS configuration information table is designed by taking one of the port mapping schemes in various configurations as an example.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of an NC-JT pattern and a port mapping, and a corresponding quasi co-location (QCL) grouping is a port group composed of ports ⁇ 0, 1, 6, 9 ⁇ for TRP1, and TRP2 is used.
  • QCL quasi co-location
  • the corresponding quasi co-location (QCL) grouping is a port group composed of ports ⁇ 0, 2, 4, 6 ⁇ .
  • TRP2 uses ports ⁇ 1, 3, 5, 7 ⁇ .
  • the DMRS configuration information table shown in Table 11 is based on the DMRS configuration information table shown in Table 3.
  • the DMRS configuration information table shown in Table 12 is based on the DMRS configuration information table shown in Table 3.
  • the corresponding column of the value value 16 to 23 is added to the left column. See Table 12 for details.
  • FIG. 18 is another schematic diagram of the pattern and port mapping corresponding to the NC-JT.
  • the corresponding quasi co-location (QCL) grouping is a port group composed of ports ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ for TRP1 and a port for TRP2. 2,3,4,5 ⁇ .
  • FIG. 19 is another schematic diagram of the pattern and port mapping corresponding to the NC-JT.
  • the corresponding quasi co-location (QCL) grouping is a port group composed of ports ⁇ 0, 2 ⁇ for TRP1 and a port for TRP2. 1,3 ⁇ .
  • the DMRS configuration information table shown in Table 15-2 is based on the DMRS configuration information table shown in Table 1, and the left column adds a value corresponding to the value of 8 to 9. For details, see Table 15-2.
  • the transmitting end selects the appropriate DMRS configuration information, and obtains the DMRS indication information according to the selected DMRS configuration information, and then sends the DMRS indication information to the DMRS configuration information. Receiving end.
  • the receiving end When receiving the value indicating the DMRS indication information, the receiving end demodulates the corresponding time-frequency resource position according to the orthogonal transmission layer number or the orthogonal port number represented by the value value or the resource not occupied by the DMRS. Reference signal.
  • the DMRS port is first scheduled from one CDM group and then scheduled across the CDM group.
  • This scheduling rule may be referred to as a CDM priority scheduling rule. .
  • different scheduling rules have different benefits. An example will be given below for specific explanation.
  • CDM group 1 contains port ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇
  • CDM group 2 contains port ⁇ 2, 3 ⁇ ;
  • CDM group 1 contains ports ⁇ 0, 1, 4, 5 ⁇ , and CDM group 2 contains ports ⁇ 2, 3, 6, 7 ⁇ ;
  • CDM group 1 contains ports ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇
  • CDM group 2 contains ports ⁇ 2, 3 ⁇
  • CDM group 3 contains ports ⁇ 4, 5 ⁇ .
  • CDM group 1 contains ports ⁇ 0, 1, 6, 7 ⁇
  • CDM group 2 contains ports ⁇ 2, 3, 8, 9 ⁇
  • CDM group 3 contains ports ⁇ 4, 5, 10,11 ⁇ .
  • the sender can allocate the DMRS port of the receiver according to the following rules. As will be described in detail below, it is worth noting that only specific scheduling rules are given here. When the DMRS mapping rules are changed, the DMRS port number assignment in the example may change, but the scheduling rules will not change.
  • CDM priority scheduling For the receiving end, the DMRS port is preferentially scheduled from one CDM group. When the port number in the CDM group is fully occupied, it is scheduled from another port group.
  • This scheme has the same advantages as the SU scheduling and MU scheduling rules.
  • a specific example is given below for the DMRS type, and the following example can be expressed as a certain value in the DMRS port scheduling table (e.g., 8-1, 8-2).
  • the scheduling port can be 0, 1 (or 2, 3), that is, the scheduling port is in the same CDM group; when the receiving end is called 3 layers, scheduling The port can be 0, 1, 2, that is, the CDM group 1 is fully scheduled, and then the port 2 in the CDM group 2 is scheduled.
  • the specific row status information can be embodied in the following table 16-1.
  • the scheduling port can be 0, 1, 4, 5, that is, the scheduling port is scheduled from the same CDM group first; when the receiving end is called 5 layers
  • the scheduling port may be 0, 1, 4, 5, 2, that is, the CDM group 1 is all scheduled, and then the ports in the CDM group 2 are scheduled.
  • Table 16-2 the following line status information can be embodied:
  • the scheduling port can be 0, 1, 2, that is, the CDM group 1 is fully occupied, and then the port in the CDM group 2 is scheduled; when the receiving end is When Layer 5 is invoked, the scheduling port can be 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, that is, the CDM groups 1, 2 are all occupied, and then the ports in the CDM group 3 are scheduled, as shown in Table 16-3:
  • the scheduling port can be 0, 1, and 6, that is, the CDM group 1 is occupied, that is, the scheduling is preferentially scheduled from the CDM group 1; when the receiving end is called At layer 5, the scheduling port can be 0, 1, 6, 7, 2, that is, the CDM group 1 is fully scheduled, and then the ports in the CDM group 2 are scheduled, as shown in Table 16-4:
  • FDM priority scheduling For the receiving end, the DMRS port scheduling is first scheduled across the CDM group. When each CDM group has a port scheduled, then the scheduling is performed from the first CDM group, and then the scheduling is continued across the CDM group.
  • the main idea is to make the number of scheduled DMRS ports in each CDM group as average as possible. For example, when 3 ports are called, for type 2, one port is called in each of the three CDM groups. This scheme has the characteristics of averaging the DMRS ports used by each CDM group during SU scheduling, so that the power in each CDM group is more even.
  • the order of the port numbers given below is only an example for better understanding. In the specific implementation, the writing order of the port numbers is not limited. For example, 0, 2, 1, 3, 4 can be written as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4
  • the scheduling port can be 0, 2, that is, the port is preferentially scheduled across the CDM group; when the receiving end is called layer 3, the scheduling port can be 0, 1, 2 That is, the CDM groups 1, 2 are each scheduled for one port, and then the ports in the CDM group 1 are called.
  • Table 16-5 shows that the CDM groups 1, 2 are each scheduled for one port, and then the ports in the CDM group 1 are called.
  • the scheduling port when the receiving end is called layer 2, the scheduling port can be 0, 2, that is, the priority is scheduled across the CDM group; when the receiving end is called 5 layers, the scheduling port can be 0, 2. 1, 3, 4, that is, the scheduled DMRS ports are distributed as evenly as possible within the CDM group. As shown in Table 16-6:
  • the scheduling port can be 0, 2, 4, that is, the CDM group 1, 2, 3 are all occupied by 1 DMRS port; when the receiving end is called 4 In the layer, the scheduling port can be 0, 2, 4, 1, that is, the CDM groups 1, 2, and 3 are all occupied, and then the ports in the CDM group 1 are re-scheduled. As shown in Table 16-7:
  • the scheduling port can be 0, 2, 4; when the receiving end is called 8 layers, the scheduling port can be 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8. As shown in Table 16-8:
  • the number of CDM groups that are preferentially scheduled by the FDM can be limited to improve the spectrum efficiency of the SU scheduling.
  • FDM priority scheduling can be performed for two of the CDM groups when the SU is limited.
  • the scheduling port can be 0, 1, 2, 3, 6, 8, ie, CDM groups 1, and 2 are scheduled.
  • Layer 8 is scheduled, the scheduling port can be 0, 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 9, that is, CDM groups 1 and 2 are called 3 ports.
  • the advantage of this scheme is that CDM Group 3 can be used to transmit data and improve spectrum efficiency. As shown in Table 16-9:
  • the DMRS port is continuously scheduled according to the size of the DMRS port number. It is irrelevant that the scheme has the characteristics of simple form design. For example, the DMRS port number corresponding to layer 3 is 0-2, the DMRS port number corresponding to layer 5 is 0-4, and the DMRS port corresponding to layer 8 is 0-7.
  • the above scheduling rules may be combined, supplemented, or simultaneously presented.
  • DMRS type 1 or type 2
  • the table may include two states of CDM priority scheduling and FDM priority scheduling, and the scheduling flexibility or spectrum efficiency is increased. As shown in Table 16-10:
  • the rule may use a continuous port number scheduling rule greater than a specific scheduling layer, and use an FDM or CDM priority scheduling rule less than a specific scheduling layer. As shown in Table 16-11:
  • a different scheduling rule or a combination of multiple rules may be used in the table for a 1-symbol or 2-symbol FL DMRS configuration.
  • the scheduling rule of the first FDM is used, and for the 2 symbols of type 2, the scheduling rules of the first FDM are used for the two CDM groups, thereby improving the spectrum efficiency of the SU scheduling when the 2 symbols are used.
  • Table 16-12 shows that for the 1 symbol of type 2, the scheduling rule of the first FDM is used, and for the 2 symbols of type 2, the scheduling rules of the first FDM are used for the two CDM groups, thereby improving the spectrum efficiency of the SU scheduling when the 2 symbols are used.
  • the rules of the SU scheduling are only given in the foregoing embodiment.
  • a specific port mapping there is no limitation.
  • the same scheduling rule can obtain different scheduled DMRS port numbers. .
  • the port in the CDM group 1 is ⁇ 0, 1, 4, 5 ⁇ and the port in the CDM group 2 is ⁇ 2, 3, 6, 7 ⁇ , the port number corresponding to the 6th layer is 0, 1 according to the FDM scheduling priority principle.
  • CDM group information or DMRS symbol information, or RMI information may be added to perform rate matching.
  • Table 17-1 and Table 17-2 are DMRS port assignment tables corresponding to different DMRS configuration types, where Table 16-1 corresponds to DMRS type 1, and Table 17-2 corresponds to DMRS type 2.
  • Tables 17-1 and 17-2 are divided into two columns according to the number of codewords to save bit overhead.
  • the structure of the table can be designed in other ways, and here is only an example.
  • CDM group 1 contains port ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇
  • CDM group 2 contains port ⁇ 2, 3 ⁇ ;
  • CDM group 1 contains ports ⁇ 0, 1, 4, 5 ⁇ , and CDM group 2 contains ports ⁇ 2, 3, 6, 7 ⁇ ;
  • CDM group 1 contains ports ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇
  • CDM group 2 contains ports ⁇ 2, 3 ⁇
  • CDM group 3 contains ports ⁇ 4, 5 ⁇ .
  • CDM group 1 contains ports ⁇ 0, 1, 6, 7 ⁇
  • CDM group 2 contains ports ⁇ 2, 3, 8, 9 ⁇
  • CDM group 3 contains ports ⁇ 4, 5, 10,11 ⁇ .
  • mapping rules there may be different DMRS port mapping rules, which are only for convenience of description in this embodiment. Specifically, for different mapping rules, the rules scheduled in the table will not change.
  • the symbol number information (symbol number) of the DMRS and the RMI information can be added to the table for rate matching of the DMRS.
  • the RMI information that can be used for the DMRS rate matching may be the number of the CDM groups that are occupied in the current system, or may be the combined state occupied by the CDM group in the current system, or may be the occupied CDM.
  • the serial number of the group, the number of co-scheduled CDM groups given in Table 17-1 and Table 17-2 is only an example. For the two methods of the number of CDM groups or the combined state in which the CDM is occupied, the method in the foregoing embodiment can be used.
  • an implementation method is: when one CDM group is occupied, the RMI in the corresponding table is "1", indicating that the CDM group 1 is occupied, and when two CDM groups are occupied, corresponding The RMI in the table is “1, 2”, indicating that the CDM groups 1 and 2 are occupied.
  • the RMI in the corresponding table is “1, 2, 3”, indicating that the CDM group 1, 2, 3 is Occupancy, in the specific implementation, the number of occupied CDM groups can be changed with the corresponding number of CDM group numbers.
  • the examples given here are only examples.
  • the symbol information of the DMRS is added to the table.
  • only a part of the table may be used in a certain scheduling to save the DCI overhead.
  • the current maximum number of DMRS symbols in the system is 1 symbol
  • the system notifies the current maximum number of DMRS symbols is 2 Configure all the states in the table.
  • the specific implementation can use the method in the above embodiment, and will not be repeated here.
  • a plurality of scheduling rules can be included in the table at the same time.
  • the current number of orthogonal ports is 2, the port number is 0, 2, and the FDM-first scheduling rule.
  • the FDM priority scheduling rule in the group can be reserved in any one or more of the three schemes to meet the requirements of flexible scheduling or cost saving.
  • Tables 17-1 and 17-2 show a scheme for saving DCI overhead by the number of codewords.
  • the number of codewords may not be classified.
  • the number of orthogonal port layers (the number of DMRS orthogonal ports) of the receiving end may be divided into multiple columns to save DCI overhead; or Table 17-1 (or table) 17-2)
  • the status of one codeword and two codeword is divided into different tables, corresponding to different bit overheads; or one table of one codeword and two codewords in Table 17-1 (or Table 17-2) can be coded together, such as
  • Tables 16-3 and 17-4 An implementation method is shown in Tables 16-3 and 17-4.
  • the order of the indication states may be changed, or some items may be replaced or removed to implement different scheduling requirements, and a certain scheduling may also be configured.
  • Some states in the table are used to save overhead, and the specific implementation method is as described in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the table may include an indication of the status of the SU and the MU, as shown in the brackets of Tables 17-3 and 17-3. It can be understood that the status indication information of the SU and the MU may not be included in the specific implementation, and only the location indication information is given. A possible implementation.
  • rate matching means that the terminal needs to know which REs in its time-frequency resource have no data transmission, so that these REs are avoided during data demodulation for correct data decoding. For example, in the downlink transmission, some REs in the time-frequency resources of the terminal may be occupied by the control channel or the RS. If the base station does not notify the terminal of the location information of the REs, the terminal performs the RS or control information of the locations as data. Demodulation, thereby introducing decoding errors.
  • the base station communicates with only one terminal, and only the information (RS, control signaling, data, etc.) of the terminal is transmitted in the time-frequency resource.
  • the terminal can directly know the RE position of its own DMRS according to its own information (such as its own port, layer number, etc.), and avoid these REs during data decoding. Therefore, there is no rate matching problem of DMRS at SU time.
  • the base station communicates with multiple terminals at the same time, and orthogonality is ensured between the terminals by using orthogonal DMRS ports (ports). Orthogonality can be ensured by time division multiplexing (TDM), frequency division multiplexing (FDM), or code division multiplexing (CDM).
  • TDM time division multiplexing
  • FDM frequency division multiplexing
  • CDM code division multiplexing
  • port1 and port2 are orthogonal through FDM or TDM, and port1 occupies RE1, the base station will not transmit port2 data on RE1, so that the data of port2 will generate noise interference to port1's DMRS, which affects channel estimation accuracy.
  • port1 and port2 are orthogonal through CDM, the above problem does not exist. This is because the DMRS of port1 and port2 occupy the same RE, but the two are multiplexed by code division multiplexing, thereby ensuring two Orthogonality between DMRSs of ports.
  • the terminal needs to know the port information of other terminals that are jointly scheduled, so that which RE locations are occupied by the DMRSs of the used ports of other terminals, and the data of the terminal is not transmitted. If the terminal cannot obtain this information, the terminal demodulates the DMRS of other users as its own data, resulting in a decoding error.
  • the MF-MIMO rate matching problem is solved by ensuring that the DMRS of the scheduling port is multiplexed by CDM. At this time, the DMRSs of all terminals are multiplexed with the same RE through CDM, thereby avoiding the rate matching of DMRS. Problem, this design can be called MU-MIMO transparent to the terminal. However, as previously described, in order to ensure this transparent design in LTE, MU-MIMO can only support a maximum of four orthogonal ports.
  • UE0 uses port 1 to port 4
  • UE1 uses port 5 to port 8, and all the REs corresponding to the ports 9 to 12 do not transmit data, which causes huge waste of resources.
  • the second type directly informs the UE of the port number of other UEs: when other UEs occupy more ports, it will cause a large signaling overhead. For example, when UE0 uses ports 1 to 2, and UE1 uses port 5 to port 8, It is necessary to notify the UE0 of the ports 5 to 8 used by the UE1, and notify the UE1 of the port 1-2 used by the UE0. In this way, the required signaling overhead is particularly large.
  • the 1/0 bit map is required to indicate the absolute position of the DMRS port group.
  • each DMRS port group in FIG. 34 uses 1 bit for separate indication.
  • 6 bits are required to indicate the actual number of layers to be sent.
  • the port allocation rule constraint is used: for example, directly indicating the number of layers scheduled by the current base station.
  • FIG. 20 there is a possibility that the layers 1-12 are respectively indicated, and 4 bits are required for indication.
  • the present application proposes a rate matching indication scheme corresponding to the maximum supported port number or the DMRS pattern or the number of CDM port groups or the DMRS configuration type in the pattern to match the 5G DMRS transmission requirement.
  • the method can include:
  • the transmitting end generates a demodulation reference signal DMRS indication information, where the DMRS indication information is used to indicate a resource that is not used by the DMRS among the resources that can be used to carry the DMRS;
  • the DMRS indication information may be silenced by indicating the number of current orthogonal transmission layers quantized, or the currently used port group state combination, or the current orthogonal transmission layer number or port group status used by the current receiving end.
  • the method before the transmitting end sends the DMRS indication information, the method further includes:
  • the DMRS transmission scheme indication information is sent to indicate the current DMRS transmission scheme; the maximum number of supported orthogonal ports corresponding to different DMRS transmission schemes is different, or the corresponding DMRS pattern or the corresponding DMRS configuration type is different.
  • different maximum supportable port numbers or DMRS patterns (or the number of CDM port groups in the DMRS pattern), or the DMRS configuration type is indicated by using different DMRS indication information, for example, for orthogonal ports, the maximum supported port The number of 4, 6, 8, 12 MU-MIMO scenarios, or for non-orthogonal ports, the maximum number of supported ports is 8, 12, 16, 24; the maximum number of supported ports has a corresponding DMRS rate. Matching status information, at least two of these DMRS rate matching states are different.
  • the DMRS indication information is to let the receiving end know the rate matching state, that is, which resource units in the time-frequency resource are not occupied by the DMRSs of other receiving ends, but are used for data transmission, and the receiving end can be used for data demodulation. Proper data decoding is performed on these resource elements.
  • the DMRS indication information is used for different DMRS patterns or DMRS port groups included in the DMRS pattern (for example, two tables may respectively correspond to two or three DMRS port groups in the DMRS pattern)
  • a DMRS pattern corresponds to a MU-MIMO scenario that supports the maximum number of supported ports.
  • the DMRS pattern indicates how many orthogonal CDM port groups it supports.
  • Each port group consists of How many resource units are formed, so different DMRS indication information is configured for different DMRS patterns, and the receiving end can also indicate that in the time-frequency resource, which resource units have not been used for DMRS transmission, but are used for data transmission. The receiving end can correctly perform data demodulation.
  • the DMRS indication information may also be configured for a DMRS configuration type.
  • the foregoing DMRS indication information may be represented by a value value, and may be N bits in a specific implementation, where the N and the DMRS port included in the DMRS pattern are included.
  • the number of groups M (CS/OCC/CS+OCC), related.
  • the number of X values can be different.
  • N may be 1 bit or 2 bits
  • the DMRS indication information in this embodiment is mainly used for rate matching, and therefore is represented by Rate matching indication information.
  • the specific form is not limited to the following form, and may be a table. , or a number, or a formula, where there is a state in P, the number of P can be full Nbits (full signaling state), or greater than N bits (increased system scheduling flexibility or other design requirements), or less than N bits (Quantization to save on signaling overhead).
  • M_p is Rate Matching Information (RMI) or a parameter set containing DMRS rate matching information, and the terminal can complete rate matching on the DMRS according to the indication of M_p.
  • RMI Rate Matching Information
  • rate matching status information is represented by RMI in the following and the drawings, and is only convenient for description, and its meaning is not limited.
  • the rate matching state information may be represented by a quantized value of the orthogonal transmission layer number or by a method such as a port number or a CDM group.
  • the rate matching indication information is related to the rate matching status information.
  • the rate matching status information can be represented by a specific orthogonal transmission layer number
  • the foregoing DMRS indication information is determined from the DMRS configuration information, and the DMRS configuration information is further
  • the indication information including the total number of orthogonal ports, the indication information of the total orthogonal port number may indicate the number of all orthogonal ports that may actually appear, or the quantized values of all orthogonal port numbers that may actually occur.
  • the quantized value of the number of all orthogonal ports is DMRS orthogonal layer number information, or DMRS antenna orthogonal port set indication information, or CDM group information of a DMRS antenna orthogonal port, or information generated according to a CDM size.
  • the quantized value of the orthogonal transmission layer number may be DMRS layer number information, or DMRS antenna port set information, or CDM group information of a DMRS antenna port.
  • the DMRS layer number information is an integer multiple of the number of DMRS antenna ports in one CDM group. For example, for a DMRS pattern with two DMRS antenna port groups, assume that port group 1 is ⁇ 1, 2, 3, 4 ⁇ and port group 2 is ⁇ 5, 6, 7, 8 ⁇ , which can be quantified as 4 layers. 8 floors.
  • the DMRS layer number information may also be an integral multiple of the number of consecutive DMRS antenna ports in a CDM group from small to large, for example, for the CDM group ⁇ 1, 2, 5, 7 ⁇ And ⁇ 3, 4, 6, 8 ⁇ can be quantified as 2 and 4 layers.
  • the information can be used by the receiving end to identify which resource units are used for the DMRS transmission of the receiving end, and which resource units are the DMRS transmissions for other receiving ends of the CDM multiplexing, and the remaining resource units are used for this.
  • the data transmission related to the receiving end therefore, the receiving end performs data demodulation on the corresponding resource unit.
  • the content of the rate matching status information may be different according to the port mapping order of the DMRS pattern, for example, may include but is not limited to:
  • the DMRS port group mute state or the used state indicates the state of each DMRS port group, and the RM content is independent of the port mapping order.
  • the CDM group number order is not specifically limited. For example, it may be according to the port group port. The smallest serial number is sorted from small to large.
  • y is the port number offset
  • p is the minimum value of the DMRS port defined by NR
  • Perform binning quantization on v to save the rate matching DCI signaling overhead. In the specific implementation, it can be quantized upwards and quantized downwards.
  • the number of consecutive DMRS numbers such as two DMRS port groups ⁇ 1, 2, 5, 6 ⁇ and ⁇ 3, 4, 7, 8 ⁇ , can be quantified. It is 2 and 4 layers.
  • the reason why the quantized value of the orthogonal transmission layer number is used is that if the number of orthogonal transmission layers of the receiving end is to be indicated, for example, the number of orthogonal transmission layers is indicated ⁇ 1, 2, 3, 4 ⁇ , it is required. 2 bits are used for indication, and the orthogonal transmission layer number ⁇ 1, 2, 3, 4 ⁇ is quantized into a value, for example, up-quantized into orthogonal transmission layer number 4, or quantized downward into orthogonal transmission layer number 1 Or use 2 or 3 to indicate that the number of orthogonal transmission layers ⁇ 1, 2, 3, 4, ⁇ indicates that the quantized value of the orthogonal transmission layer only needs one bit to indicate, for example, 0 indicates orthogonal transmission.
  • the quantized value of the number of layers is 4, so the indication overhead can be reduced.
  • DMRS group status information or DMRS group serial number or group number; or the number of DMRS groups, wherein the number of CDM groups is a CDM group occupied/coordinated in the system.
  • the transmitting end sends the DMRS indication information by using a time-frequency resource.
  • the rate matching manner corresponding to the maximum number of supported ports or different DMRS patterns is indicated by the DMRS indication information, one mode is implicit indication, and the other mode is explicit signaling.
  • the DMRS indication information indicates whether the rate matching manner corresponding to the maximum number of supported ports or different DMRS patterns is mapped to the DMRS indication information.
  • one mode is implicit indication
  • the other mode is explicit signaling. The way to indicate.
  • the quantized value of the orthogonal transmission layer number is configured in the DMRS configuration information table, and the DMRS indication information is indicated by using DMRS indication information (value) in the DMRS configuration information table;
  • the DMRS configuration information table may be Similar to LTE, for example, Antenna ports in LTE, scrambling identity and number of layers indication, it may also include DMRS port number, port index At least one of sequence generation information and CDM type, on the basis of which a quantized value of the orthogonal transmission layer number is added.
  • the DMRS configuration information table can be saved on both the transmitting end and the receiving end, and the transmitting end sends the indication information to the receiving end.
  • the transmitting end sends the original DCI signaling in the LTE to the receiving end (due to the signaling using the LTE)
  • the DCI signaling may not be named as indication information, but it may indicate a rate matching scheme.
  • the receiving end obtains its own port information and the quantized total transmission layer of the system through the signaling, and combines the two information to calculate The port used by other receiving ends. That is, the receiving end identifies which resource units are used for the DMRS transmission of the receiving end, which resource units are the DMRS transmissions for other receiving ends of the CDM multiplexing, and the remaining resource units are used for the relevant receiving end.
  • the data transmission therefore, the receiving end performs data demodulation on the corresponding resource unit.
  • the correspondence between the foregoing DMRS indication information and the rate matching state information exists by being independent of the DMRS configuration information table in the LTE, that is, the correspondence between the DMRS indication information and the rate matching state information. It is not implicit in the DMRS configuration information table. Therefore, in addition to the DMRS configuration information table, the transmitting end and the receiving end respectively store the correspondence relationship configuration table of the DMRS indication information and the rate matching status information (or the information table can pass Configuring the RRC, the correspondence configuration table exists independently of the DMRS configuration information table, and the transmitting end sends the rate configuration indication information to the receiving end by means of explicit signaling, and the receiving end uses the DMRS indication information as an index.
  • the corresponding relationship matching table is used to search for the corresponding rate matching status information, and the receiving end combines the rate matching status information with the DMRS configuration information table to identify which resource units are used by the DMRS of the receiving end, and which resource units are used. It is occupied by the DMRS of other receiving ends that are multiplexed by CDM, and the remaining resource units are used for receiving End-related data transmission, therefore, the receiving end performs data demodulation on the corresponding resource unit.
  • the DMRS indication information of the same value may correspond to the quantized values of different orthogonal transmission layers. Therefore, the correspondence between the DMRS indication information and the quantized value of the orthogonal transmission layer number may also be performed through separate signaling. Instructions. It should be understood that, for the explicit indication scheme, the quantized orthogonal transmission layer number is indicated by the DMRS indication information, and the receiving end receives two signaling, one is DMRS DCI signaling in LTE, and one is used for The DMRS indication information of the current quantized orthogonal transmission layer or the signaling including the DMRS indication information (which may be referred to herein as rate matching indication signaling) may be transmitted.
  • the foregoing DMRS indication information when the foregoing DMRS indication information is sent to the receiving end, it may be sent in an independent signaling manner, or may be carried in the downlink signaling. This is not limited here.
  • the signaling for transmitting the DMRS indication information and the mapping between the DMRS indication information and the quantized value of the orthogonal transmission layer number may be a radio resource control (RRC) or a medium access control control unit (The media access control control element (MAC CE) or DCI is transmitted to the receiving end, or a combination of any two or three of the three types of signaling.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • MAC CE media access control control element
  • DCI is transmitted to the receiving end, or a combination of any two or three of the three types of signaling.
  • the signaling determines whether to send the DMRS indication information by the number of codewords. For example, if one codeword triggers signaling to send DMRSDMRS indication information, two codewords do not send the signaling because the two-wordword corresponds to SU-MIMO (single user multiple-input multiple-output, SU- In a MIMO (MIMO) scenario, a transmitting end, for example, a base station, communicates with only one receiving end (terminal), and only information (RS, control signaling, data, etc.) of the terminal is transmitted in the time-frequency resource. At this time, the terminal can directly know the RE position of its own DMRS according to its own information (such as its own port, layer number, etc.), and avoid these REs during data decoding. Therefore, there is no rate matching problem of DMRS at SU time.
  • SU-MIMO single user multiple-input multiple-output
  • S203 The receiving end receives the DMRS indication information.
  • S204 Obtain rate matching information according to the DMRS indication information, and perform data demodulation on a resource that does not transmit the DMRS.
  • the receiving end searches for the quantized value of the corresponding orthogonal transmission layer in the DMRS configuration information table after receiving the DMRS indication information (and further knows the DMRS layer).
  • Number information, or DMRS antenna port set information, or code division multiplexing CDM group information of the DMRS antenna port, etc., and the number of layers used by itself, DMRS port number, etc., and the receiving end identifies which resource units are For the DMRS transmission of the receiving end, which resource units are DMRS transmissions for other receiving ends of the CDM multiplexing, and the remaining resource units are used for data transmission related to the receiving end, therefore, the receiving end is in the corresponding Data demodulation is performed on the resource unit.
  • the receiving end will The indication information is used as an index to search for a corresponding rate matching state in the correspondence relationship configuration table, and the receiving end combines the rate matching state information with the DMRS configuration information table to identify which resource units are used for the DMRS of the receiving end.
  • resource units are DMRS transmissions for other receiving ends (optionally, in one implementation method, the information can be directly obtained through rate matching information), and the remaining resource units are used for correlation with the receiving end
  • the data transmission therefore, the receiving end performs data demodulation on the corresponding resource unit.
  • the DMRS indication and reception method provided by the present application can also be applied to a non-coherent joint transmission (NC-JT) 2 PDCCH scenario.
  • N-JT non-coherent joint transmission
  • two transmitters of a non-quasi-coherent QCL group are used, and the silence is not Data transmission is performed after the resource unit corresponding to the DMRS of the transmitting end.
  • the transmitting end mutually mute the DMRS ports group.
  • the TRP can be muted by default for the DMRS corresponding RE location in the QCL group of the other TRP.
  • the two DMRS port groups can be non-QCL, and the ports in each DMRS port group are QCL.
  • Two TRPs can use one port group separately, so the solution can be directly solved without additional signaling indication.
  • DMRS pattern type 2 which includes three DMRS port groups, there can be one scenario where one TRP uses one DMRS port group and the other TRP uses two DMRS port groups. In this case, two DMRS port groups are included.
  • the TPR needs indication information to indicate, and the TPR using one DMRS port group can be indicated without indication information.
  • the method can be independently indicated.
  • the steps shown in FIG. 21 refer to the steps shown in FIG. 21:
  • the DMRS indication information is generated by the transmitting end of the unrelated joint transmission, and the DMRS indication information is generated according to the DMRS port in the QCL group that can be used by the coordinated multiple TRPs;
  • step S202 the transmitting end sends the DMRS indication information to the receiving end, where the DMRS indication information indicates the resource unit corresponding to the DMRS that can be used by the coordinated multiple TRPs for the 1PDCCH scenario, and the rate matching information indicates the local transmission for the 2PDCCH scenario.
  • the operation after receiving the DMRS indication information by the receiving end is the same as that of S203 and S204 in the foregoing embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
  • the transmitting end may be a terminal, and the receiving end may be a network device, such as a base station. If the technical solution is applied to a downlink transmission scenario, the transmitting end may be a network device, such as a base station, and the receiving end may be a terminal.
  • the method for indicating the DMRS rate matching provided by the present application may be matched with multiple scenarios of the NR by using the DMRS indication information corresponding to the maximum supported port number or the DMRS pattern or the DMRS configuration type, for example, NC-JT or dynamic TDD or flexible.
  • the above method can be applied to the complex and varied scenarios of the NR, and can also meet the requirements of higher layer data transmission and reduce the indication overhead.
  • the DMRS port here refers to all DMRS ports supported by the system. As for the actual implementation, whether all the DMRS ports are used in one scheduling process or some DMRS ports in all the DMRS ports are used. This application is not limited.
  • the fifth embodiment mainly describes designing explicit signaling to indicate DMRS indication information.
  • the maximum number of supportable orthogonal ports supported by TRP0 is 12, wherein the port assigned to terminal 0 (UE0) is 1, 2, 7, 8 ports, and the port assigned to terminal 1 (UE1) It is 3, 4, 9, 10ports.
  • the 12 DMRS ports are divided into 3 DMRS port groups, which are DMRS port group 1, DMRS port group 2, and DMRS port group 3;
  • Each DMRS port group includes 4 DMRS ports.
  • the same time-frequency resources are multiplexed by the CDM method between the DMRSs corresponding to the DMRS ports in each DMRS port group.
  • the mapping rules for these three DMRS port groups are as follows:
  • the time-frequency resource mapped by the first DMRS port group includes the 12th, 12n+1, 12n+6, 12n+7 subcarriers of the resource unit in the frequency domain.
  • the time-frequency resource mapped by the second DMRS port group includes the 12n+2, 12n+3, 12n+8, 12n+9 subcarriers of the resource unit in the frequency domain.
  • the time-frequency resource mapped by the third DMRS port group includes the 12th+4, 12n+5, 12n+10, 12n+11 subcarriers of the resource unit in the frequency domain.
  • n can be greater than or equal to 0 and less than Any one or more integers.
  • M the number of subcarriers of a resource unit in the frequency domain
  • M is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • M is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • DMRS port group 1 contains DMRS ports ⁇ 1, 2, 7, 8 ⁇
  • DMRS port group 2 contains DMRS ports ⁇ 3, 4, 9, 10 ⁇
  • DMRS port group 3 contains DMRS ports ⁇ 5, 6, 11, 12 ⁇ .
  • the specific DMRS port mapping mode is not limited. It is worth noting that the rate matching status information also changes when the DMRS port mapping mode changes. According to the method introduced in this program, people in related fields can easily obtain it.
  • the quantized value of the orthogonal transmission layer indicating the rate matching state information may also change. Therefore, the correspondence between the DMRS indication information and the quantized value of the orthogonal transmission layer number can be indicated by one signaling.
  • the value of the DMRS indication information Value can be expressed in two ways, one is decimal and the other is binary.
  • the DMRS indication information when indicated by binary, it can be expressed by 2 bits.
  • the SU/MU MIMO DMRS configuration information table supporting a maximum of 12 orthogonal port numbers is similar to the DCI signaling table of LTE DMRS. This table is only applicable to transparent MU-MIMO, receiving end. Use this form to get information such as your own DMRS port and orthogonal transmission layer.
  • the receiving end may further know, according to the RMI indicated by the DMRS indication information (the specific value of the value) that has been received, the quantized current orthogonal transmission layer number, or the currently used port group state combination, or the current non-receipt end.
  • the quantized value representing the current orthogonal transmission layer number is 8, so that both the DMRS port group 1 and the DMRS port group 2 are occupied.
  • UE0 combines its own port information obtained in Table 4 to know that DMRS port group 1 contains its own DMRS port, and DMRS port group 2 does not include its own DMRS port, so that DMRS port group 2 is known to be used by other terminals, and thus will not be transmitted. Your own data.
  • the UE1 learns that the quantized value of the orthogonal transmission layer is 4, and combines the port information obtained in Table 4, and further knows that the DMRS port group 1 and the DMRS port group 2 are occupied, thereby knowing that they are not themselves.
  • the DMRS port group 1 location used does not transfer its own data.
  • UE0 and UE1 learn that the DMRS port group 3 location can transmit data through rate matching information.
  • the RMI value and the DCI information table may be different.
  • the RMI in the above example is the current quantization layer number, or may be the DMRS port group. Serial number.
  • the maximum number of supported ports supported by the system shown in Figure 22 is 12.
  • the TRP can also support the maximum number of supported ports, such as 4, 6, and 8, and the maximum number of supported ports can be supported.
  • the explicit signaling, such as the RRC, MAC CE, or DCI indication, can also be bound to other configuration parameters corresponding to the scenario, such as frequency, carrier spacing, and frame structure.
  • the maximum number of supportable ports supported by TRP0 is 6, wherein the port allocated to terminal 0 (UE0) is 1, 2 ports, and the port allocated to terminal 1 (UE1) is 3, 4 ports.
  • the DMRS ports used by UE0 and UE1 have multiple multiplexing modes.
  • the six DMRS ports are divided into three DMRS port groups, which are DMRS port group 1, DMRS port group 2, and DMRS port group 3;
  • the time-frequency resource mapped by the DMRS port group 1 includes at least one of the 12th, 12n+1, 12n+6, 12n+7 subcarriers of the resource unit in the frequency domain.
  • the time-frequency resource mapped by the DMRS port group 2 includes at least one of the 12n+2, 12n+3, 12n+8, 12n+9 subcarriers of the resource unit in the frequency domain.
  • the time-frequency resource mapped by the DMRS port group 3 includes at least one of 12n+4, 12n+5, 12n+10, 12n+11 subcarriers of the resource unit in the frequency domain.
  • n can be greater than or equal to 0 and less than Any one or more integers.
  • the three CDM groups occupy one symbol in the time domain.
  • the DMRS indication information when indicated by binary, it can be expressed by 2 bits.
  • the receiving end may also know the quantized current orthogonal transmission layer according to the RMI indicated by the received DMRS indication information (the specific value of the value), or the currently used port group state combination, or the current non-reception.
  • DMRS port information of other paired terminals can be obtained.
  • the quantized value representing the current orthogonal transmission layer number is 4, and it is assumed that the DMRS port group 1 includes the DMRS port ⁇ 1, 2 ⁇ .
  • DMRS port group 2 includes DMRS port ⁇ 3, 4 ⁇ , and DMRS port group 3 includes DMRS port ⁇ 5, 6 ⁇ .
  • rate matching information it can be known that DMRS port group 1 and DMRS port group 2 are used, and DMRS port group is used. 3 is not used.
  • the terminal can know the port group location used by other terminals by combining its own DMRS port information.
  • the maximum number of supportable ports supported by TRP0 is 8, wherein the port allocated to terminal 0 (UE0) is 1, 2, 3, 4 ports, and the port allocated by terminal 1 (UE1) is 5. 6,7,8ports.
  • the DMRS ports used by UE0 and UE1 can have multiple multiplexing modes.
  • the 8 DMRS ports are divided into 2 DMRS port groups, respectively DMRS port group 1, DMRS port group 2; each DMRS port group includes 4 DMRS ports.
  • the same time-frequency resources are multiplexed by the CDM method between the DMRSs corresponding to the DMRS ports in each DMRS port group.
  • the mapping rules for these two DMRS port groups are as follows:
  • the time-frequency resources mapped by each DMRS port group are mapped to two consecutive symbols in the time domain, and:
  • the time-frequency resources mapped by the DMRS port group 1 include at least one of the 12th, 12n+2, 12n+4, 12n+6, 12n+8, 12n+10 subcarriers of the resource unit in the frequency domain.
  • the time-frequency resources mapped by the DMRS port group 2 include at least one of the 12n+1, 12n+3, 12n+5, 12n+7, 12n+9, 12n+11 subcarriers of the resource unit in the frequency domain.
  • n can be greater than or equal to 0 and less than Any one or more integers.
  • the DMRS indication information when indicated by binary, it can be expressed by 1 bit.
  • the receiving end may also know the quantized current orthogonal transmission layer according to the RMI indicated by the received DMRS indication information (the specific value of the value), or the currently used port group state combination, or the current non-reception.
  • the port group status combination is taken as an example below, and the quantization parameter layer number scheme can refer to the previous example.
  • both the DMRS port group 1 and the DMRS port group 2 are occupied, and the UE0 can obtain the DMRS port information according to itself, and learns itself.
  • the DMRS port group used, so that other port groups are used by other UEs, and their own data is not transmitted, and then rate matching is performed.
  • the maximum number of supportable ports supported by TRP0 is 4, wherein the port allocated to terminal 0 (UE0) is 1, 2 ports, and the port allocated by terminal 1 (UE1) is 3, 4 ports.
  • the DMRS ports used by UE0 and UE1 can have multiple CDM multiplexing modes.
  • FIG. 29 it is a schematic diagram of a mapping rule for two DMRS ports, where each shadow small square represents one.
  • the DMRS port group is mapped to the RE, and the four DMRS ports are divided into two DMRS port groups, which are DMRS port group 1, DMRS port group 2, and each DMRS port group includes two DMRS ports.
  • the same time-frequency resources are multiplexed by the CDM method between the DMRSs corresponding to the DMRS ports in each DMRS port group.
  • the mapping rules for these two DMRS port groups are as follows:
  • the time-frequency resources mapped by each DMRS port group are mapped to 1 symbol in the time domain, and:
  • the time-frequency resource mapped by the DMRS port group 1 includes the 2nth sub-carrier of the resource unit in the frequency domain.
  • the time-frequency resource mapped by the DMRS port group 2 includes the 2n+1th subcarrier of the resource unit in the frequency domain.
  • n can be greater than or equal to 0 and less than Any one or more integers.
  • DMRS port group 1 contains DMRS port ⁇ 1, 3 ⁇
  • DMRS port group 2 contains DMRS port ⁇ 2, 4 ⁇ .
  • value 0 (decimal) or 00 (binary)
  • the DMRS indication information when indicated by binary, it can be expressed by 1 bit.
  • the receiving end may also know the quantized current orthogonal transmission layer according to the RMI indicated by the received DMRS indication information (the specific value of the value), or the currently used port group state combination, or the current non-reception.
  • the orthogonal transmission layer or port group status used by the terminal, or the resource unit to be muted can obtain the DMRS port information of other paired terminals, thereby performing rate matching. For example, when the value of the indication information value received by UE0 is 1 (decimal) or 01 (binary), the quantized value representing the current orthogonal transmission layer is 4, and the terminal knows the DMRS port group 1 through the rate matching information.
  • Both the DMRS port group 2 and the DMRS port group 2 are used together, and the DMRS port group used by other terminals can be known to perform rate matching.
  • the schemes of FIG. 27 and FIG. 29 can also be quantized into layers 1 and 2 according to the scheduling sequence of the base station, such as the first FDM post-DMM scheduling, so that the rate matching information in this embodiment can be configured with the DMRS pattern. (type) or the number of port groups included in the DMRS pattern corresponds to each other, thereby simplifying the overhead of storage at the receiving end.
  • the maximum number of orthogonal transmission layers that can be supported is different for different DMRS pattern and DMRS port mapping modes.
  • the rules are as follows:
  • the number of quantized orthogonal transmission layers can be obtained by the following method. Only one rule is given here. The specific implementation can be directly stored as a value, and the selected process is not required:
  • port group 1 ⁇ 1, 2, 3, 4 ⁇ port group 2 ⁇ 5, 6, 7, 8 ⁇ , quantized to 4, 8;
  • port group 1 ⁇ 1, 3, 5, 7 ⁇ port group 2 ⁇ 2, 4, 6, 8 ⁇ , quantized to 1, 2;
  • port group 1 ⁇ 1, 2, 5, 7 ⁇ port group 2 ⁇ 3, 4, 6, 8 ⁇ , quantized to 2, 4;
  • port group 1 ⁇ 1, 2, 5, 6 ⁇ port group 2 ⁇ 3, 4, 7, 8 ⁇ is quantized to 2, 4.
  • port group 1 ⁇ 1, 2, 3, 4 ⁇ port group 2 ⁇ 5, 6, 7, 8 ⁇ port group 3 ⁇ 9, 10, 11, 12 ⁇ , quantized to 4, 8, 12;
  • port group 1 ⁇ 1, 4, 7, 10 ⁇ port group 2 ⁇ 2, 5, 8, 11 ⁇ port group 3 ⁇ 3, 6, 9, 12 ⁇ , quantized to 1, 2, 3;
  • port group 1 ⁇ 1, 2, 7, 8 ⁇ port group 2 ⁇ 3, 4, 9, 10 ⁇ port group 3 ⁇ 5, 6, 11, 12 ⁇ , quantized to 2, 4, 6;
  • port group 1 ⁇ 1, 2, 7, 10 ⁇ port group 2 ⁇ 3, 4, 8, 11 ⁇ port group 3 ⁇ 5, 6, 9, 12 ⁇ , quantized to 2, 4, 6;
  • the DMRS configuration information table corresponding to each maximum supportable transport layer can be designed to meet the requirements of different scenarios in the NR system.
  • Different signaling is designed to indicate different DMRS patterns.
  • the content in the table may be different for different DMRS port mapping modes, and may be the current orthogonal transmission layer number or the state of the DMRS port group.
  • the schematic mapping order is the DMRS pattern of the FDM mapping after the CDM mapping.
  • the overhead of the corresponding indication information is different, for example:
  • the rate matching state information RMI is 2, that is, the current orthogonal
  • RM For the pattern supporting 8 orthogonal ports shown in Figure 30(b), 1 bit is required to indicate RM.
  • the schematic mapping order is the DMRS pattern of the CDM mapping after the FDM mapping.
  • the overhead of the corresponding indication information is different, for example:
  • multiple DMRS patterns may correspond to the same RM table, for example, 31(a) and 31(b) may correspond to the same rate matching table, such as the table of 31(a), and 31 (c)
  • the same rate matching table as 31(d), such as the table of 31(c) and the table may correspond to the DMRS type or the number of port groups in the DMRS pattern.
  • the schematic mapping order is a CDM and FDM hybrid port mapping method.
  • the overhead of the corresponding indication information is different, for example:
  • multiple DMRS patterns may correspond to the same RM table, for example, 32(a) and 32(b) may correspond to the same rate matching table, such as a table of 32(a), and 32.
  • the same rate matching table as 32(d), such as the table of 32(c), and the table may correspond to the DMRS type or the number of port groups in the DMRS pattern.
  • FIGS. 33(a) to 33(d) it is a port group use state of the DMRS pattern.
  • the overhead of the corresponding DMRS indication information is different, for example:
  • RM For the pattern supporting 8 orthogonal ports shown in Figure 33(b), 1 bit is required to indicate RM.
  • 33(a) and 33(b) may correspond to the same rate matching table, such as a rate matching table of 33(a), where the table may correspond to the DMRS type, or the number of port groups in the DMRS pattern.
  • the advantage of this method is that it can save the overhead of terminal storage.
  • RM For the pattern supporting the six orthogonal ports shown in Figure 33 (c), 2 bits is required to indicate RM.
  • RM For the pattern supporting 12 orthogonal ports shown in Figure 33(d), 2 bits is required to indicate RM.
  • 33(c) and 33(d) may correspond to the same rate matching table, and the table may correspond to the DMRS type or the number of port groups in the DMRS pattern.
  • the advantage of this method is that it can save the overhead of terminal storage.
  • CDM combination in this solution is only an example, and may be reduced or increased, or replaced with other DMRS state combinations in a specific implementation process.
  • the value can directly correspond to the state combination of the port group being occupied, and does not need the representation of the RMI.
  • FIG. 33(a) it can be described as Table 19-1.
  • the state of the SU can be added to the table, such as Table 19-2.
  • the 0 layer here is mainly used to notify the terminal that it is currently in the SU state, and does not limit the specific expression.
  • the DMRS configuration information and the DMRS indication information may be hierarchically indicated by a combination of RRC, MAC-CE, and DCI.
  • a parameter set may be configured through RRC, where the quantized orthogonal transmission layer number information or the CDM group is included.
  • the status information is used for rate matching of the DMRS, and the parameter set is notified by the DCI signaling to notify the terminal.
  • the above multiple quantized orthogonal transmission layer number methods may be placed in a parameter set, where the parameter set may include other information, such as a ZP-CSI-RS or a PDSCH start position, an end position, and the like.
  • the tables given here are only examples, and the specific form, size, and description form are not limited.
  • the parameter set may be configured through RRC, where the parameter set may include DMRS-related rate matching information as shown in Table 20.
  • the information about the total orthogonal transmission layer or the total orthogonal port number (in this case, the total orthogonal transmission layer number and the total orthogonal port number are numerically equal) are designed into the DMRS configuration information table.
  • the information about the total number of orthogonal ports is represented by an indication information, which may indicate the number of all orthogonal ports that may actually occur, or the quantized value of all orthogonal port numbers that may actually occur, and the number of all orthogonal ports.
  • the quantized value may be DMRS orthogonal layer number information, or DMRS antenna orthogonal port set indication information, or CDM group information of a DMRS antenna orthogonal port, or information generated according to a CDM size.
  • the DMRS configuration information table in Tables 1 to 4 above is added in this embodiment.
  • This embodiment considers all possible total orthogonal transmission layers, can adapt all scenarios, and can be used for rate matching of multiple terminals that perform MU adaptation.
  • the feature of the total orthogonal transmission layer number is added, that is, the quantized layer number information, and the terminal combines the information to obtain the RMI information implicitly.
  • the quantized layer num is a quantized value of the number of possible orthogonal transmission layers, and is indicated by using the same value of the DMRS indication information (value) in the DMRS configuration information table; the DMRS configuration information table may be similar to that in LTE.
  • Antenna ports in LTE, scrambling identity and number of layers indication which may also include DMRS port number, port index, sequence generation information, At least one of the CDM types, on the basis of which the quantized value of the orthogonal transmission layer number is added.
  • the DMRS configuration information table may be stored on the transmitting end and the receiving end at the same time.
  • the transmitting end needs to indicate the rate matching scheme to the receiving end, only the indication information needs to be sent to the receiving end, and after receiving the indication information, the receiving end receives the indication information.
  • the DMRS configuration information table is used to search for the quantized value of the corresponding orthogonal transmission layer, and the DMRS layer information, or the DMRS antenna port set information, or the code division multiplexing CDM group information of the DMRS antenna port is also known.
  • the receiving end identifies which resource units are used for the DMRS transmission of the receiving end, which resource units are the DMRS transmissions for other receiving ends of the CDM multiplexing, and the remaining resource units are used for the receiving end Related data transmission, therefore, the receiving end performs data demodulation on the corresponding resource unit.
  • the indication information in the embodiment of the present application indicates a DMRS port group status that is not used by the receiving end itself. Specifically, it can be indicated by DCI:
  • the table 25 can be configured on the transmitting end and the receiving end according to the protocol, or can be sent by the transmitting end to the receiving end through RRC signaling.
  • the receiving end can determine the state of the DMRS port group that is not used by itself, thereby completing rate matching.
  • the MU column in Table 25 is only an example, and may not be implemented in the specific implementation.
  • one way is also to indicate whether the DMRS port group that is not used by itself is silent, as shown in Table 26 below, where the larger and smaller sets can be based on the non-receiving end itself.
  • the relative relationship of the used port groups is determined. For example, for a scenario of three port groups, when the terminal uses one port group, the larger and smaller port groups can be based on the largest (or minimum) of the remaining two port groups. The relative relationship (such as the size) of the port number is determined. In the specific implementation, the larger and smaller port groups can be directly stored without including the comparison process.
  • the port group number may not be defined, and the port group is indicated by the port number in the port group. For example, if port group 2 includes the port ⁇ 5, 6, 7, 8 ⁇ , the port group 2 may be directly in the table. Replace with ⁇ 5,6,7,8 ⁇ , as shown in Table 27.
  • the SMARS rate matching information can be indicated by RRC+DCI multi-level indication or RRC+MAC CE+DCI multi-level indication.
  • the RRC can configure multiple DMRS rate matching parameter sets to dynamically select through DCI signaling.
  • the RRC configures two parameter sets, and the 1-bit DCI signaling is dynamically selected.
  • the RRC configures four parameter sets and dynamically performs 2-bit DCI signaling, as shown in Table 28-1 and Table 28-2.
  • the parameter set contains the rate matching information of the DMRS.
  • the rate matching status information can be expressed in various forms, such as:
  • the CDM group can be numbered, for example, 1, 2, and 3DMRS CDM groups.
  • the status of the CDM group number may not exist, and the CDM group may be indicated.
  • the port number is implemented.
  • the CDM group information is used in the DMRS configuration information table to implement rate matching of the DMRS.
  • the RMI can be represented as status information of the CDM group, such as the "State of CDM group" column of 8-1 and 8-2.
  • the following is an example of a specific DMRS pattern, where the specific DMRS port port number is only an example.
  • the DMRS port index in the following embodiments may be changed, which is not limited herein.
  • State 1 corresponds to CDM Group 1 being occupied (the diagonal line portion in Figures 34(c) and (d)), and State 2 represents CDM Groups 1 and 2 being occupied ( Figure 34). (c) and (d) in the diagonal and cross-line portions), state 3 represents that CDM groups 1, 2, and 3 are occupied (the diagonal and horizontal lines in Figs. 34(c) and (d), Vertical line)).
  • each state can be replaced with a state in which other CDM groups are occupied.
  • Group 1) or can be directly represented as all port numbers in the CDM group (such as CDM group 1 can be represented as port number 0, 1, or 0, 1, 4, 6) or at least one DMRS port number in the occupied CDM group (For example, CDM group 1 can be expressed as port number 0 or 0, 1).
  • the symbol number column may be omitted in Table 8-1 and Table 8-2, and the 1 symbol or the 2 symbol is implicitly indicated by directly indicating all the port numbers in the CDM group.
  • FL DMRS pattern for example, for 1 symbol type1, CDM group 1 is represented as 0, 1, for 2 symbol type 1, CDM group 1 is represented as 0, 1, 4, 6, and the receiving end can be recessive according to the port number in the CDM group. Get information of 1 symbol or 2 symbol DMRS.
  • the RMI information of the table may represent the number of occupied CDM groups, that is, the “State of CDM group” in Tables 8-1 and 8-2 may be replaced with 'number of CDM groups' or 'number Of co-scheduled CDM groups', the specific text expression is not limited.
  • Table 29-1 shows an addition method corresponding to DMRS type 1, and 'number of co-scheduled CDM groups' indicates that one or two CDM groups in type 1 are occupied.
  • the number of CDM groups can be implemented according to a certain scheduling order, as obtained according to the current quantized orthogonal port layer number in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the number of CDM group information may directly correspond to a specific CDM group sequence number, or based on a certain scheduling rule. For example, for DMRS type 1, one CDM group can be occupied corresponding to CDM group 1, and two CDM groups can be understood as CDM group 1 and CDM group 2 are occupied.
  • CDM group 1 For DMRS type2, one CDM group can be occupied by CDM group 1, two CDM groups can be understood as CDM group 1 and CDM group 2 are occupied, and three CDM groups can be understood as CDM group 1, 2, and 3 Occupied.
  • the number of CDM groups may not be bound to the CDM group number.
  • one CDM group is used by only one CDM group in the system, and the CDM group may be CDM group 1 or CDM group 2, the receiving end can obtain the occupied CDM group serial number according to its specific DMRS port number, and the two CDM groups indicate that two CDM groups are occupied, and the receiving end may use one or two CDM groups, if the receiving end Using CDM group 2, it can be inferred that CDM group 1 is occupied by other receiving ends, thereby performing rate matching.
  • the number of CDM groups added in the table may not include the number of CDM groups used by the receiving end itself, that is, the CDM group in the table indicating that the system is currently used and does not include the CDM group used by the receiving end itself.
  • the number can be understood as (the total number of CDM groups occupied in the system - the number of CDM groups used by the receiving end). For example, for Type1, when two CDM groups are called in the system and two CDM groups are used at the receiving end, the number of CDM groups used by the non-receiving end itself is 0. When the system has two CDM groups called, the receiving end uses In a CDM group, the number of CDM groups used by the non-receiving end is one.
  • the receiving end uses one CDM group, and the number of CDM groups used by the non-receiving end is zero.
  • the number of CDM groups in this scheme can be replaced with the number of co-scheduled CDM groups in Table D-1. Specific Forms researchers in this field can directly derive tables based on the above principles.
  • the power boosting information may be added to the DMRS configuration information table.
  • a column added in 29-1 gives a power boosting value for each state.
  • the specific value may be 0db, 3dB for type 1, for type 2 can be 0dB, 1.77dB, 4.77dB.
  • the specific value of power boosting can be directly inferred according to the number of CDM groups occupied by the current state and the information of the receiving port, and the power boosting value has a one-to-one correspondence with the state.
  • the specific principle is that for DMRS type 1, when the receiving end uses one CDM port group, and the system currently only has one CDM port group occupied, the power boosting value is 0 dB; when the receiving end uses two CDM port groups When the system currently has 2 CDM port groups occupied, the power boosting value is 0 dB; when the receiving end uses 1 CDM port group, and the system currently has 2 CDM port groups occupied, the power boosting value is 3 dB.
  • An example of a corresponding DMRS type 1 is given in Table 29-2.
  • the specific port call and symbol number are not limited.
  • the power boosting value is 0 dB
  • the power boosting value is 0 dB
  • the power boosting value is 1.77 dB
  • the power boosting value is 4.77dB.
  • a receiving end can only call up to 4 ports in a CDM group, that is, a MU can only occupy at most one CDM group.
  • An example of a corresponding DMRS type 2 is given in Table 29-3. The specific port call and symbol number are not limited.
  • This embodiment is used to solve the DMRS rate matching problem in a non-coherent joint transmission (NC-JT 2 PDCCH) scenario.
  • a solution provided in this embodiment is a protocol default solution: the TRP defaults to mute the DMRS corresponding RE locations in one or more QCL groups that are not available to the TRP itself. For example, for the DMRS pattern shown in FIG. 36, that is, two DMRS port groups, the two TRPs silence the time-frequency resource locations corresponding to the DMRS ports that are not used by themselves, so the solution can be directly solved without additional signaling. Instructions.
  • the independent indication scheme is as shown in FIG. 37: TRP defaults to muting the DMRS corresponding RE locations in one or more QCL groups that are not available to the TRP itself, and further, for TRPs having multiple port groups,
  • the RM signal is sent to the UE, and the rate matching signaling can be applied according to the previously introduced solution.
  • the rate matching signaling is based on the DMRS port that can be used by the current TRP or can support the maximum number of layers or
  • the DMRS pattern corresponding to the DMRS port that can be used by itself is generated.
  • the UE performs rate matching according to the rate matching signaling received by the UE, and the scheme can use the scheme in the previous embodiment.
  • only one DMRS pattern is exemplified, and for different DMRS patterns, corresponding RM signaling can be used.
  • TRP0 can only use DMRS port group 1, and TRP1 can use DMRS port groups 2 and 3.
  • TRP0 silences DMRS port groups 2 and 3 corresponding time-frequency resources, and TRP1 matches DMRS port group 1 The frequency resource is silent.
  • the terminal receives the rate matching signaling of TRP1, which indicates the number of quantized orthogonal transmission layers common to port groups 2 and 3, that is, the number of quantized orthogonal transmission layers of the DMRS port that can be used by TRP1.
  • TRP0 may have no rate matching signaling, or rate matching signaling may send a status representing the SU.
  • the terminal receives the rate matching signaling of the TRP1, completes the rate matching, and demodulates the data sent by the TRP1.
  • the manner in which the indication information indicates the DMRS port group used by the non-receiving end itself may be used.
  • TRP0 enters the NC-JT mode
  • no signaling indication is needed, or the original signaling indication is used, but TRP1 is indicated by the following table.
  • This embodiment 10 is applicable to a dynamic TDD or a flexible duplex scenario.
  • TRP0 uses ⁇ 1, 2, 3, 4 ⁇ DMRS ports
  • TRP1 uses ⁇ 5, 6, 7, 8 ⁇ DMRS ports
  • a solution provided in this embodiment is a protocol default solution: the TRP defaults to mute the DMRS corresponding RE locations in one or more QCL groups that are not available to the TRP itself.
  • the TRP defaults to mute the DMRS corresponding RE locations in one or more QCL groups that are not available to the TRP itself.
  • the TRP defaults to mute the DMRS corresponding RE locations in one or more QCL groups that are not available to the TRP itself.
  • the TRP0 and the TRP1 uses one DMRS port group, and silences the time-frequency resource location corresponding to the DMRS port group that is not used by itself. Therefore, the solution Can be solved directly without additional signaling instructions.
  • the independent indication scheme is as shown in FIG. 40: the TRP defaults to muting the DMRS corresponding RE locations in one or more QCL groups that are not available to the TRP itself, and further, for the TRPs having multiple port groups,
  • the RM signal is sent to the UE, and the rate matching signaling may be applied according to the previously introduced solution.
  • the rate matching signaling may be based on the DMRS port that can be used by the current TRP or the DMRS corresponding to the DMRS port that can be used.
  • the pattern is generated.
  • the UE performs rate matching according to the rate matching signaling received by the UE, and the scheme can use the scheme in the previous embodiment.
  • only one DMRS pattern is exemplified, and for different DMRS patterns, corresponding RM signaling can be used.
  • TRP0 can only use DMRS port group 1, and TRP1 can use DMRS port groups 2 and 3.
  • TRP0 silences DMRS port groups 2 and 3
  • TRP1 silences DMRS port group 1 and, in addition,
  • the terminal receives the rate matching signaling of the TRP1, where the signaling indicates the number of quantized orthogonal transmission layers of the DMRS port groups 2 and 3, that is, the number of quantized orthogonal transmission layers of the TRP1.
  • the TRP0 may have no rate matching signaling, or Rate matching signaling can send a status representative of the SU.
  • the terminal receives the rate matching signaling of the TRP1, completes the rate matching, and demodulates the data sent by the TRP1.
  • the manner in which the indication information indicates the DMRS port group used by the non-receiving end itself may be used.
  • TRP0 enters the NC-JT mode
  • no signaling indication is needed, or the original signaling indication is used, but TRP1 is indicated by the following table.
  • each network element such as a base station or a terminal.
  • each network element such as a base station or a terminal.
  • it includes hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to the execution of the respective functions.
  • the present application can be implemented in a combination of hardware or hardware and computer software in combination with the elements and algorithm steps of the various examples described in the embodiments disclosed herein. Whether a function is implemented in hardware or computer software to drive hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the solution. A person skilled in the art can use different methods to implement the described functions for each particular application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of the present application.
  • the embodiment of the present application may divide a function module into a base station or a terminal according to the foregoing method example.
  • each function module may be divided according to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module.
  • the above integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of the module in the embodiment of the present application is schematic, and is only a logical function division, and the actual implementation may have another division manner. The following is an example of dividing each functional module by using corresponding functions:
  • FIG. 41 shows a schematic structural view of a transmitting end 350.
  • the transmitting end 350 can be the base station 100 or the terminal 200 referred to above.
  • the transmitting end 350 can include a processing unit 3501 and a transmitting unit 3502.
  • the processing unit 3501 may be configured to execute S101 in FIG. 6, that is, select DMRS configuration information from multiple DMRS configuration information tables, and obtain DMRS indication information according to the DMRS configuration information, or execute S201 shown in FIG. 21, that is, Demodulation reference signal DMRS indication information is generated; the DMRS indication information corresponds to a maximum supportable port number or DMRS pattern, or a DMRS configuration type, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
  • the sending unit 3502 may be configured to perform the action of transmitting, by the transmitting end, the DMRS related information or the DMRS indication information by the time-frequency resource in the S102 in FIG. 6 or the S202 in FIG. 21, and/or to support the technology described herein. Other processes. All the related content of the steps involved in the foregoing method embodiments may be referred to the functional description of the corresponding functional modules, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 42 shows a schematic structural diagram of a receiving end 360.
  • the receiving end 360 can include a processing unit 3602 and a receiving unit 3603. Wherein: the receiving end 360 can be the terminal 200 or the base station 100 involved in the above.
  • the receiving unit 3603 is configured to perform an action of receiving the DMRS indication information performed by the receiving end in S103 in FIG. 6 or an action for performing the receiving the DMRS indication information performed by the receiving end in S203 in FIG. 21, and / The action of receiving any information by the receiving end involved in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processing unit 3602 may be configured to perform S104 in FIG. 6, that is, according to the received DMRS indication information, or to perform S204 in FIG.
  • the receiving end 360 first acquires symbols carried on each RE by using, for example, but not limited to, an inverse fourier transform (IFFT) (eg, acquiring each OFDM symbol per The symbol carried on the subcarriers), and then, according to the time-frequency resource where the DMRS is located, the DMRS is obtained from the acquired symbols.
  • IFFT inverse fourier transform
  • the transmitting end 350 to the receiving end 360 are presented in a form corresponding to each function module, or the form of each functional module is divided in an integrated manner.
  • a “module” herein may refer to an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a processor and memory that executes one or more software or firmware programs, integrated logic circuits, and/or other devices that provide the above functionality. Wherein the processor and the memory can be integrated or relatively independent.
  • device 390 can include a memory 3901, a processor 3902, and a communication interface 3903.
  • the memory 3902 is used to store computer execution instructions.
  • the processor 3901 executes the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 3902, so that the device 390 executes the information transmission method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication interface 3903 can be a transceiver.
  • the device 390 can be a field-programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a system on chip (SoC), and a central processor (central Processor unit (CPU), network processor (NP), digital signal processor (DSP), microcontroller (micro controller unit (MCU), programmable controller (programmable logic device) , PLD) or other integrated chips.
  • FPGA field-programmable gate array
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • SoC system on chip
  • CPU central Processor unit
  • NP network processor
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • MCU microcontroller
  • programmable controller programmable logic device
  • PLD programmable logic device
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a storage medium, which may include a memory 3902.
  • a data transmission method for transmitting a plurality of data streams to a receiving end device through a plurality of demodulation reference signal DMRS ports, wherein the plurality of DMRS ports are divided into It belongs to at least two port groups, and each of the DMRS ports in each port group satisfies a quasi-co-located QCL relationship, and any DMRS port in each port group and any other port group meets the non-standard Co-locating a non-QCL relationship; the plurality of DMRS ports are allocated to at least two transmitting end devices, and the DMRS ports allocated by each transmitting end device belong to the same port group, and the method includes:
  • each transmitting end device maps one codeword to a data stream corresponding to the DMRS port to which the transmitting end device is allocated;
  • Each transmitting device sends a data stream corresponding to the DMRS port to which the transmitting device is allocated to the receiving device.
  • the at least two transmitting end devices are at least two antenna panels of the same transmitting end device
  • Each of the transmitting end devices maps one codeword to a data stream corresponding to the DMRS port to which the transmitting end device is allocated. Specifically, for each antenna panel, the same transmitting end device maps a codeword to the antenna panel to be allocated to the antenna panel. Data stream corresponding to the DMRS port;
  • the method further includes: the at least two transmitting ends A transmitting device in the device sends an indication information to the receiving device, where the indication information is used to indicate the multiple DMRS ports allocated to the receiving device.
  • the method further includes: the same transmitting device
  • the receiving end device sends an indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate the multiple DMRS ports allocated to the receiving end device.
  • the number of the plurality of data streams (that is, the number of the plurality of DMRS ports) is less than or equal to 4, but may not be limited thereto.
  • the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present invention may be applied to a scenario in which the number of data streams is less than or equal to 4, and is not applied to a scenario in which the number of data streams is greater than 4.
  • the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present invention may be applied to a scenario in which the number of data streams is 3 and/or 4 (ie, the number of the multiple data streams). It is 3 and/or 4), and is not applied to the scene in which the number of the plurality of data streams is 2.
  • the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present invention may also be not limited by the foregoing scenario.
  • a data receiving method including:
  • the receiving end device For each of the at least two port groups, the receiving end device recovers a codeword according to a data flow corresponding to the DMRS port in the port group of the plurality of DMRS ports.
  • the method before receiving the plurality of data streams, the method further includes:
  • the indication information is used to indicate the multiple DMRS ports.
  • the number of the plurality of data streams (that is, the number of the plurality of DMRS ports) is less than or equal to 4, but may not be limited thereto.
  • the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present invention may be applied to a scenario in which the number of data streams is less than or equal to 4, and is not applied to a scenario in which the number of data streams is greater than 4.
  • the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present invention may be applied to a scenario in which the number of data streams is 3 and/or 4 (ie, the number of the multiple data streams). It is 3 and/or 4), and is not applied to the scene in which the number of the plurality of data streams is 2.
  • the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present invention may also be not limited by the foregoing scenario.
  • a data receiving method including:
  • a codeword is recovered according to the plurality of data streams.
  • the method before receiving the plurality of data streams, the method further includes:
  • the indication information is used to indicate the multiple DMRS ports.
  • the number of the plurality of data streams is less than or equal to four.
  • the indication information is downlink control information DCI.
  • the above data stream is also called the data layer.
  • a transmitting end device is configured to send, by using at least one other transmitting end device, a plurality of data to a receiving end device through a plurality of demodulation reference signals DMRS ports.
  • the plurality of DMRS ports belong to at least two port groups, and each of the DMRS ports in each port group meets a quasi-co-located QCL relationship, and any DMRS port and any other port in each port group Any DMRS port in the group satisfies a non-quasi-co-located Non-QCL relationship; the plurality of DMRS ports are assigned to the transmitting end device and the at least one other transmitting end device, the transmitting end device and the at least A DMRS port to which each of the other transmitting devices belongs to belong to the same port group, and the transmitting device includes:
  • mapping module configured to map a codeword to a data flow corresponding to the DMRS port to which the transmitting device is allocated
  • a transmitting module configured to send, to the receiving end device, a data stream corresponding to the DMRS port to which the transmitting device is allocated.
  • the transmitting end device and the at least one other transmitting end device are at least two antenna panels of the same transmitting end device
  • the mapping module is configured to be in the same transmitting end device, and the mapping module is specifically configured to, for each antenna panel, map one codeword to a data stream corresponding to the DMRS port to which the antenna panel is allocated;
  • the transmitting module is disposed in the same transmitting end device, and the transmitting module is specifically configured to send, by each antenna panel, a data stream corresponding to the DMRS port to which the antenna panel is allocated, to the receiving end device.
  • the transmitting module is further configured to send, to the receiving end device, an indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate the multiple DMRS ports allocated to the receiving end device.
  • the number of the plurality of data streams is less than or equal to four.
  • a receiving end device including:
  • a receiving module configured to receive multiple data streams through multiple DMRS ports, where the multiple DMRS ports belong to at least two port groups, and each of the DMRS ports in each port group meets a quasi-co-located QCL relationship. Any DMRS port in each port group satisfies a non-quasi-co-location Non-QCL relationship with any of the other port groups;
  • a recovery module configured to recover, for each port group of the at least two port groups, a codeword according to a data flow corresponding to the DMRS port in the port group of the plurality of DMRS ports.
  • the receiving module is further configured to receive an indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate the multiple DMRS ports.
  • the number of the plurality of data streams is less than or equal to four.
  • a receiving end device including:
  • a receiving module configured to receive multiple data streams through multiple DMRS ports, where the multiple DMRS ports belong to the same port group, and each of the DMRS ports in the port group meets a quasi-co-located QCL relationship;
  • a recovery module configured to recover a codeword according to the multiple data streams.
  • the receiving module is further configured to receive an indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate the multiple DMRS ports.
  • the number of the plurality of data streams is less than or equal to four.
  • the indication information may be downlink control information DCI.
  • a data transmitting method for transmitting a plurality of data streams to a receiving end device by using a plurality of demodulation reference signal DMRS ports, wherein the plurality of DMRS ports are divided into It belongs to at least two port groups, and each of the DMRS ports in each port group satisfies a quasi-co-located QCL relationship, and any DMRS port in each port group and any other port group meets the non-standard Co-locating a Non-QCL relationship; the plurality of DMRS ports are assigned to the same transmitting device, and for each port group, the method includes:
  • the transmitting end device maps a codeword to a data flow corresponding to the DMRS port in the port group of the plurality of DMRS ports;
  • the transmitting end device sends the data stream to the receiving end device.
  • the method further includes: the transmitting end device sending an indication information to the receiving end device, where the indication information is used to indicate the multiple DMRSs allocated to the receiving end device port.
  • the number of the plurality of data streams is less than or equal to four.
  • a transmitting end device is configured to send, by using a plurality of demodulation reference signals DMRS ports, a plurality of data streams to a receiving end device, where the multiple DMRSs
  • the port belongs to at least two port groups, and each DMRS port in each port group satisfies a quasi-co-located QCL relationship, and any DMRS port in each port group satisfies any one of the other port groups.
  • a non-quasi-co-located Non-QCL relationship the plurality of DMRS ports are allocated to the transmitting device, and the transmitting device includes:
  • mapping module configured to map, for each port group, a codeword to a data stream corresponding to a DMRS port in the port group of the plurality of DMRS ports;
  • a transmitting module configured to send the data stream to the receiving end device.
  • the method further includes: the transmitting module is further configured to send, to the receiving end device, an indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate the multiple allocated to the receiving end device DMRS ports.
  • the number of the plurality of data streams is less than or equal to four.
  • the embodiment of the present invention provides a data sending method, where the method is used to send multiple data streams to a receiving end device through multiple demodulation reference signal DMRS ports, where the multiple DMRS ports belong to a plurality of data streams.
  • At least two port groups each of the DMRS ports in each port group meets a quasi-co-located QCL relationship, and any DMRS port in each port group satisfies non-pre-shared with any of the other port groups.
  • Address Non-QCL relationship, for each port group the method includes:
  • the method further includes: sending, to the receiving end device, an indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate the multiple DMRS ports allocated to the receiving end device.
  • the number of the plurality of data streams is less than or equal to four.
  • the multiple DMRS ports may be allocated to the same transmitting device; or may be allocated to multiple antenna panels of the same transmitting device, where the DMRS ports allocated to each antenna panel belong to the same port group; It can also be assigned to multiple transmitter devices that serve the same receiving device (for example, CoMP (Coordinated Multi-Point) related technology), and the DMRS ports allocated to each transmitting device belong to the same port group.
  • the foregoing DMRS port may also be allocated to one or more transmitting devices in other manners, such as, but not limited to, various feasible combinations of the foregoing manners.
  • an embodiment of the present invention further provides a data receiving method, including:
  • the receiving end device For each of the same port group or at least two port groups, the receiving end device recovers a codeword according to the data flow corresponding to the DMRS port in the port group of the multiple DMRS ports.
  • the method before receiving the plurality of data streams, the method further includes:
  • the indication information is used to indicate the multiple DMRS ports.
  • the number of the multiple data streams is less than or equal to 4.
  • the receiving device can not care whether the above multiple DMRS ports are from one transmitting device, multiple antenna panels from one transmitting device, or multiple transmitting devices.
  • QCL Quadrature-Co-Location
  • Similar spatial directions such as but not limited to beam direction, etc.
  • non-quasi-co-location Non-Quasi-Co-Location
  • Non-QCL Non-quasi-co-location
  • Related content about QCL and Non-QCL has been clearly described in the prior art, and therefore will not be described here.
  • the information bits are usually divided in the form of a Transport Block (TB), and one transport block can be a codeword (CW).
  • TB Transport Block
  • CW codeword
  • the contents of the TB and CW can be referred to. current technology
  • the DMRS port supported by the system can be divided into multiple port groups, and each DMRS port in each port group satisfies the QCL relationship, and any DMRS port in each port group and any other port group A DMRS port satisfies the Non-QCL relationship.
  • the DMRS ports allocated for each transmitting device are from the same port group.
  • DMRS ports 0 to 9 can be divided into two port groups, namely port group 1 and port group 2, where DMRS ports 0 to 4 belong to port group 1, and DMRS ports 5 to 9 belong to port group 2.
  • any number of DMRS ports in the port group 1 may be allocated to the transmitting device, or any number of DMRS ports in the port group 2 may be allocated to the transmitting device.
  • the DMRS ports allocated to the same transmitter device may be from the same port group or different from each other.
  • Port group For example, when from the same port group, port 1 and port 2 in the above port group 1 can be assigned to the transmitting device; when from different port groups, ports 2 to 3 in the port group 1 can be used. And the ports 8 to 9 in the above port group 2 are allocated to the transmitting device.
  • the wireless transmission of the transmitting device through the DMRS ports in different port groups will have Non-QCL characteristics, for example, having different large scales. Decline, or point to different spatial directions.
  • the wireless transmission by the transmitting device through the DMRS port in the same port group will have QCL characteristics, such as having similar large-scale fading, or pointing Similar spatial direction.
  • the device may be set in advance, or the DMRS port may be used by the transmitting device.
  • the packet is notified to the receiving device in advance, for example, but not limited to, the transmitting device accesses the communication network through RRC (Radio Resource Control) message, for example, but not limited to, the receiving device accesses the device, or periodically, notifies the receiving end. device.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the DMRS port can be allocated to the transmitting device according to the grouping situation and specific needs (for example, various application scenarios, such as CoMP).
  • Multiple transmitter devices may be multiple transmitter devices or multiple antenna panels of the same transmitter device.
  • the above transmitting device may be, for example but not limited to, a base station.
  • the above receiving device may be, for example but not limited to, a terminal.
  • the foregoing indication information may be sent by one of the plurality of transmitting end devices, in which case the transmitting end device transmitting the indication information may be called For service devices, other transmitter devices may be referred to as collaboration devices.
  • the above data stream can also be referred to as a data layer, which can usually be obtained by layer mapping a codeword.
  • the specific process can refer to the prior art.
  • the steps in the above methods may be performed by one or more processors, and executed by one or more processors.
  • the functions of the respective modules in the above-mentioned transmitting end device and receiving end device may be integrated on one or more processors for execution, or may be executed by one or more processors executing programs.
  • the above embodiments it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • a software program it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer program instructions When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, the processes or functions described in accordance with embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions can be stored in a computer readable storage medium or transferred from one computer readable storage medium to another computer readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions can be from a website site, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server or data center via wired (eg coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (eg infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer readable storage medium can be any available media that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device that includes one or more servers, data centers, etc. that can be integrated with the media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (eg, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (eg, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (such as a solid state disk (SSD)) or the like.
  • a magnetic medium eg, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape
  • an optical medium eg, a DVD
  • a semiconductor medium such as a solid state disk (SSD)

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请公开了一种DMRS指示和DMRS接收的方法及装置，所述方法包括：发射端从多组解调参考信号DMRS配置信息中确定与当前DMRS传输方案对应的DMRS配置信息，并根据DMRS配置信息得到DMRS指示信息；所述每组DMRS配置信息包含多条DMRS配置信息；所述发射端发送所述DMRS指示信息。实施本申请提供的方法和装置，与NR的多种场景进行匹配，可以满足更高层数的数据传输的需求，可以进一步降低指示开销。。

Description

一种DMRS指示和接收方法，发射端和接收端
本申请要求于2017年8月11日提交中国专利局、申请号为201710686645.9、申请名称为“一种DMRS指示和接收方法，发射端和接收端”的中国专利申请，以及于2017年11月17日提交中国专利局、申请号为201711147995.4、申请名称为“一种DMRS指示和接收方法，发射端和接收端”的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及通信领域，尤其涉及一种解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal，DMRS)指示和接收方法，发射端和接收端。
背景技术
多输入多输出(英文全称：Multiple-Input Multiple-Output，英文简称：MIMO)技术利用空间维度的资源，可以在不增加系统带宽的前提下，使信号在空间获得阵列增益、复用和分集增益以及干扰抵消增益，成倍地提升通信系统的容量和频谱效率。例如，在长期演进(英文全称：Long Term Evolution，英文简称：LTE)系统中，单用户(single user，SU)最大支持8层正交DMRS端口复用，DMRS占用24个RE。具体的：在频域上，DMRS端口可以映射在每个资源块(resource block，RB)对(pair)的第0、1、5、6、10、11个子载波上；在时域上，DMRS端口可以映射在每个子帧的5、6、12和13个符号上。如图1所示。
然而随着人们对高速率、高可靠性、低延迟等通信要求的不断提高，现代通信系统将一直面临着更大容量、更广覆盖和更低延迟的挑战，这些需求也成为未来网络(英文全称：new radio，英文简称：NR)的关键需求。
在通信系统的接收端解调过程中，相比于非相干解调，相干解调性能更好，且具有3dB左右的优势，因而相干解调更广泛被现代通信系统所采用。然而OFDM系统对每个载波的调制都是抑制载波的，接收端的相干解调是需要基准信号的，又称作导频信号或者参考信号(英文全称：Reference Signal，英文简称：RS)，它们在OFDM符号内分布于时频二维空间中不同的资源单元(英文全称：Resource Element，英文简称：RE)上，具有已知的幅度和相位。同样在MIMO系统中，各根发送天线(虚拟天线或物理天线)具有独立的数据信道，基于预知的RS信号，接收机针对每根发送天线进行信道估计，并基于此还原发送数据。
信道估计指的是为了补偿信道衰落和噪声而重建接收信号的过程，它利用发送机与接收机预知的RS来追踪信道的时域和频域变化。例如，为了实现高阶多天线系统的数据解调，LTE/-A系统定义了解调参考信号(英文全称：Demodulation Reference Signal，英文简称：DMRS)，该参考信号用于上下行控制信道和数据信道如物理下 行共享信道(英文全称：Physical Downlink Share Channel，英文简称：PDSCH)的解调。
DMRS和用户数据采用相同的预处理方式，其特点为：
1)用户特定(UE-specific)的，即每个终端数据与其对应的解调参考信号采用相同的预编码矩阵。
2)从网络侧来看，各层传输的DMRS相互正交。
3)DMRS一般被用来支持波束成形和预编码技术，因而只在被调度的资源块上发送，发送的数量与数据流数(或称为层数)相关，与天线端口一一对应，而非物理天线数，前者小于或等于后者，两者通过层映射和预编码联系起来。
在现行标准中，下行采用DMRS的最大可以支持正交数据流数为8个，每个PRB pair里面资源开销为24个Re，DMRS以块状导频形式分布于各个PRB内。各个端口(port)分别占用12个RE，即其port密度相同。同时，DMRS的序列设计依据各个port的密度确定，因而其长度为定值。
然而，新空口(英文全称：New Radio，英文简称：NR)支持的场景更为多样化，因而会支持多种模式(pattern)，例如为适应不同频段数据传输，复用方式会有着很大的不同。并且，为了进一步满足更大容量传输需求，数据信道的DMRS的最大可支持正交数据流数会大于8个，如3gpp RAN1 #88bis会议已经支持正交12 DMRS ports。
此外，相比于LTE系统中的收发天线都非常低，因此MU配对时所支持的MU维度较低，如在MU调度时，允许单个用户最大层数为2层，总正交层数为4层。但在未来网络中，4RX终端可能作为收天线维度的基线而存在，此时MU维度将会发生变化。
在实际传输中，基站需要告知终端其分配的层数，DMRS端口号，序列配置，复用方式等信息。在LTE中，这些信息通过DCI进行指示。但是，NR已支持多种pattern，port数、复用方式和映射规则存在多种变化，沿用LTE的DCI指示方式将造成很大的开销，因此在NR中如何指示DMRS是亟待解决的技术问题。
发明内容
为解决上述技术问题，本申请提供一种解调参考信号指示和接收方法及装置。
在NR系统的MU-MIMO场景下，其能支持的CDM复用的正交端口与LTE中不同，最大能够支持到12个正交端口，因此LTE中仅根据一张DMRS配置信息表来告知终端其分配的层数，DMRS正交端口号，序列配置，复用方式等信息的方式不再适用，本申请实施例中，设计多组DMRS配置信息分别匹配未来网络(new radio，NR)的不同场景DMRS传输需求。
一方面，本申请提供的解调参考信号指示和接收的方法，包括：
发射端从多组解调参考信号DMRS配置信息中确定与当前DMRS传输方案对应的DMRS配置信息，并根据DMRS配置信息得到DMRS指示信息；所述每组DMRS配置信息包含多条DMRS配置信息；然后发送DMRS信息至接收端；接收端接收到DMRS指示信息后，辅助数据解调。
本申请实施例中，当前的DMRS传输方案是通过指示信息来指示的；不同的DMRS传输方案对应的最大可支持正交端口数不同，或对应的DMRS图样或对应的DMRS配置 类型不同。
所述不同的DMRS传输方案对应的DMRS配置信息的最大可支持正交端口数不同。
所述不同的DMRS传输方案对应的DMRS指示信息的长度不同。
所述至少一条DMRS配置信息中的多个DMRS端口分属不同的码分多址CDM组，其中不同的CDM组之间满足非准共址QCL关系。
一种实现方式中，针对不同的最大可支持正交端口数，可以配置不同组的DMRS配置信息，该组DMRS配置信息包含多条DMRS配置信息；例如，对于最大可支持正交端口数为4，正交端口数为6，正交端口数为8，正交端口数为12的MIMO场景，分别配置对应的DMRS配置信息，该DMRS配置信息是让接收端知道其能使用的DMRS正交端口号，序列配置，复用方式等等，以进行正确的数据译码。
另一种实现方式中，该DMRS配置信息针对不同的DMRS图样来配置的，一般来讲，一种DMRS图样就对应着一种支持最大可支持正交端口数或者最大可支持正交传输层数的MIMO场景，该DMRS图样示意出其支持多少个正交的正交端口组，每一个正交端口组由多少个资源单元组成，因此针对不同的DMRS图样配置不同的DMRS配置信息，也可以让接收端知道知道其能使用的DMRS正交端口号，序列配置，复用方式等等，以进行正确的数据译码。
在第一方面的一种实现方式中，DMRS配置信息可以是由协议约定表格来呈现的，其具体实现形式可以是下行控制信息(downlink control information，DCI)表(table)，多张DCI table至少含有一组不同的DMRS配置信息；一组DMRS配置信息里面包含多条DMRS配置信息，用一张表格呈现，本文中称作DMRS配置信息表。
与DMRS信息对应的DMRS传输方案是通过高层信令例如例如无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)信令发送的，当然也可以和场景对应的其他配置参数绑定，如频点，载波间隔、帧结构等。DMRS指示信息即可通过DCI信令或媒体接入控制控制单元(media access control control element，MAC CE)发送。
在具体实现中，每一张DMRS配置信息表对应不同的最大可支持正交端口(port)数，例如最大可支持正交端口数可以是{4、6、8、12}中的至少两种；
在另一种实现方式中，每一张DMRS配置信息表可以对应不同的DMRS图样(pattern)或者DMRS配置类型(configuration type)。
在一种实现方式中，所述DMRS配置信息表中，依据按照正交端口组合进行分列设计，例如小于或等于4层传输层的正交端口组合，与大于4层传输层的正交端口组合分列设计；
在一种实现方式中，所述DMRS配置信息以DMRS配置信息表的形式呈现的时候，可以依据码字数量(codeword number)进行划分，也可以不依据码字数量进行划分，而是依据总的最大可支持正交端口数或依据接收端的传输层数进行分列，具体的可以按照某种比例进行划分。
所述DMRS配置信息表中还包括总正交端口数的指示信息，该指示信息可以指示实际可能出现的所有正交端口数，或者实际可能出现的所有正交端口数的量化值。所有正交端口数的量化值可以是DMRS正交层数信息，或者是DMRS天线正交端口集合指示信息，或者DMRS天线正交端口的CDM组信息，或者是依据CDM大小生成的 信息。应理解的是，总正交端口数与总正交DMRS传输层数相同。所述DMRS天线正交端口的CDM组信息可以为CDM组个数或CDM组号或CDM组状态信息。
需要说明的是，所述的多组DMRS配置信息可以用一张总的信息表来呈现，也即多个DMRS配置信息表可以是一张信息总表，该一张信息总表支持最大可支持正交端口数，多个DMRS配置信息表是该信息总表的子集，从该信息总表中选取子集可以依据最大可支持正交端口数或者DMRS图样或者是高层信令进行选择。
其中，DMRS配置信息中的所述DMRS天线正交端口的CDM组信息为CDM组状态信息或CDM组序号或CDM组编号或CDM组个数；一种实现方式中，所述CDM组个数为系统中被占用/调度(co-scheldued)的CDM组。
其中其中，DMRS配置信息中的所述DMRS配置信息中还包括DMRS的符号信息。
其中，通过RRC信令配置所述DMRS配置信息可使用的范围，该可使用的范围是基于DMRS的符号信息或者DMRS最大符号个数来确定的。
其中，所述DMRS配置信息可使用的范围与无线资源控制信令RRC中指示DMRS最大符号个数的参数绑定。
其中所述DMRS最大符号个数不同时，进行DMRS端口调度的下行控制信信息DCI信令长度不同，或DCI比特个数不同，或DCI域不同。
其中，利用所述DMRS配置信息进行单用户SU调度时，在2个CDM组内先进行FDM调度在NR系统的MIMO场景下，其能支持的CDM复用的正交端口与LTE中不同，最大能够支持到12个正交端口。终端通常需要知道被共同调度的其他终端的端口信息，从而获得哪些RE位置被其他终端的所使用端口的DMRS占用，不会传输自己的数据。如果终端不能获得这些信息，终端会将其他用户的DMRS当作自己的数据进行解调，从而导致译码错误。如何使终端知道哪些端口的DMRS被占用，需要一种有效的DMRS速率匹配指示方式，为了解决这一技术问题，本申请提供一种解调参考信号指示方法和接收方法，包括：
发射端生成解调参考信号DMRS指示信息；所述DMRS指示信息用于指示可用于承载DMRS的资源中未被DMRS占用的资源；发射端向接收端发送所述DMRS指示信息；接收端根据所述DMRS指示信息，在未被DMRS占用的资源上进行数据解调。具体的，接收端需要通过下行控制信息或媒体接入控制控制单元接收所述DMRS指示信息
接收端根据接收到的DMRS指示信息，获得量化的当前正交传输层数，或当前已被使用端口组状态组合，或当前非本接收端使用的正交传输层数或端口组状态，或需被静默的资源单元，以获得可用于承载DMRS的资源中未被DMRS占用的资源。
一种实现方式中，接收端在接收DMRS指示信息之前，还接收指示所述当前DMRS传输方案的DMRS传输方案指示信息；不同的DMRS传输方案对应的最大可支持正交端口数不同，或对应的DMRS图样或对应的DMRS配置类型不同。
应理解的是，DMRS传输方案是通过DMRS图样或DMRS配置类型或最大可支持正交端口数来体现的。
需要说明的是，这里的最大可支持的正交端口数为发射端在当前帧内能够调度的最大正交端口数，比如可以使用12port的DMRS pattern，但是当前的最大端口调度数仅 为4，最大可支持的正交端口数与基站调度有关，小于等于DMRS pattern所支持的最大正交端口数。
例如，对于最大可支持的正交端口数为4、6、8、12的MU-MIMO场景，或者对于非正交端口数为8，12，16，24的场景(2个扰码的场景)，也即根据不同的最大可支持正交端口数，分别配置对应的DMRS指示信息，该指示信息是让接收端知道，时频资源内，哪些资源单元被其他用户的DMRS占用，没有自己的数据，接收端在数据解调的时候就可以避开这些资源单元，以进行正确的数据译码。
另一种实现方式中，该DMRS指示信息针对不同的DMRS图样来配置的，也可以对应于DMRS图样中DMRS端口组的个数进行配置(比如可以有两张表格分别对应DMRS图样中含有2个或者3个DMRS端口组。)。
一般来讲，一种DMRS图样就对应着一种支持最大可支持正交端口数的MU-MIMO场景，该DMRS图样示意出其支持多少个正交的CDM端口组，每一个端口组由多少个资源单元组成，因此针对不同的DMRS图样配置不同的指示信息。
再一种实现方式中，指示信息还可以针对DMRS配置类型(congfigration type)来进行配置。
以上方式，都可以让接收端知道，在时频资源内，哪些资源单元被其他用户的DMRS占用，接收端便可以正确的进行数据解调。
一种实现方式中，接收端需要接收以信令的方式发送的所述DMRS指示信息与可用于承载DMRS的资源中未被DMRS占用的资源之间的对应关系。这里所说的信令通常是高层信令，例如RRC信令。
另一种实现方式中，本接收端还存储有DMRS配置信息，也即，DMRS指示信息与可用于承载DMRS的资源中未被DMRS占用的资源之间的对应关系在本地存储的DMRS配置信息中可以查找到。
本申请实施例中的DMRS配置信息还包括总正交端口数的指示信息，该总正交端口数的指示信息可以指示实际可能出现的所有正交端口数，或者实际可能出现的所有正交端口数的量化值。所述所有正交端口数的量化值是DMRS正交层数信息，或者是DMRS天线正交端口集合指示信息，或者DMRS天线正交端口的CDM组信息，或者是依据CDM大小生成的信息。所述DMRS天线正交端口的CDM组信息为CDM组个数或CDM组号或CDM组状态信息。
其中，所述DMRS正交层数信息中，所述的DMRS正交层数是一个CDM组中的DMRS天线端口数量的整数倍；或者是一个CDM组中序号连续的DMRS天线端口数量的整数倍；或者是一个CDM组中的DMRS天线端口的序号的值。在具体的实现中，DMRS层数信息可以是分档量化的DMRS层数信息。所述分档量化的DMRS层数信息中，DMRS层数可以是一个CDM组中的DMRS天线端口数量的整数倍。比如，对于一个含有两个DMRS天线端口组的DMRS图样，假设端口组1包含DMRS端口{1，2，3，4}，端口组2包含DMRS端口{5，6，7，8}，则可以量化为4层与8层。此外，所述DMRS层数信息中，DMRS层数还可以是一个CDM组中的从小到大排序时序号连续的DMRS天线端口数量的整数倍，比如，对于CDM组{1，2，5，7}和{3，4，6，8}，可以量化为2层与4层。这些信息，都可以让接收端识别出哪些资源单元是被本接收端的DMRS占用，哪些资源单元是被 CDM复用的其他接收端的DMRS占用，剩下的资源单元便是用于与本接收端相关的数据传输，因此，本接收端在相应的资源单元上进行数据解调。
之所以用正交传输层数的量化值，是因为如果要指示接收端具体的传输层数，例如如需分别指示传输层数{1，2，3，4}，需要2个bits来进行指示，而将传输层数{1，2，3，4}进行量化，例如向上量化成传输层数4，或者向下量化成传输层数1，或者用2或3来表示该组传输层数{1，2，3，4}，则指示传输层数的量化值只需要一个bit就可以指示了，例如用0表示传输层数的量化值4，因此可以减少指示开销。
基于上述原理，本申请实施例DMRS指示信息可以指示正交传输层数的量化值，一种方式是隐性指示，另一种方式是显性的方式进行指示。
隐性指示方案中，上述正交传输层数的量化值配置在DMRS配置信息表中，而指示信息采用DMRS配置信息表中的DMRS指示信息(value)来进行指示；该DMRS配置信息表可以与LTE中的类似，例如，LTE中的天线端口数(Antenna ports)，扰码指示(scrambling identity)和传输层数指示(number of layers indication)，它还可以包含DMRS端口数、端口索引、序列生成信息、CDM类型中的至少一种，在此基础上，添加传输层数的量化值。该DMRS配置信息表可以同时保存在发射端和接收端上，发射端向接收端发送指示信息，应理解的是，发射端向接收端是通过发送LTE中原有的DCI信令(由于沿用LTE的信令，该DCI信令可能不会命名为指示信息，但是其可以指示速率匹配方案)，接收端通过该信令同时获得自己的端口信息与系统的量化总传输层数，结合该两个信息，计算出其他接收端使用的端口。也即，接收端识别出哪些资源单元是被用于本接收端的DMRS传输，哪些资源单元是用于CDM复用的其他接收端的DMRS传输，剩下的资源单元便是用于与本接收端相关的数据传输，因此，本接收端在相应的资源单元上进行数据解调。
在显性信令指示方案中，上述的指示信息和正交传输层数的量化值的对应关系通过独立于LTE中的DMRS配置信息表而存在，也即指示信息和传输层数的量化值之间的对应关系没有隐含在DMRS配置信息表中，因此发射端和接收端除了分别保存有DMRS配置信息表之外，还分别保存指示信息和传输层数的量化值的对应关系配置表(或者该信息表可以通过RRC进行配置)，该对应关系配置表独立于DMRS配置信息表而存在，发射端通过显性信令的方式，将速率配置指示信息发送给接收端，接收端将该指示信息作为索引，在对应关系配置表中查找对应的传输层数的量化值，接收端将该传输层数的量化值与所述DMRS配置信息表相结合，识别出哪些资源单元是被用于被本接收端的DMRS占用，哪些资源单元是被CDM复用的其他接收端的DMRS占用，剩下的资源单元便是用于与本接收端相关的数据传输，因此，本接收端在相应的资源单元上进行数据解调。
需要说明的是，相同值的指示信息可以对应不同的传输层数的量化值，因此指示信息与传输层数的量化值之间的对应关系还可以通过单独的信令进行指示。
应理解的是，对于显性指示方案，量化的传输层数就是通过指示信息指示的，接收端会收到两个信令，一个是LTE中的DMRS DCI信令，一个是用来传输当前量化传输层数的指示信息(本文中又可以称为rate matching信令)。
可以理解的是，无论是隐性指示还是显性指示的方案中，上述的DMRS指示信息 发送到接收端的时候，可以是以独立信令的方式发送，也可以是携带在下行信令中发送，例如下行控制信息DCI中发送，在此不作限定。
在一种实现方式中，所述DMRS指示信息由码字(codeword)的个数确定是否发送。例如，如1个codeword则触发信令以发送DMRS指示信息，2个codeword则不发送该信令，原因在于，1个codeword时候有SU和MU的场景，但是2个codeword一定是SU场景，在2个codeword对应的SU-MIMO(single user multiple-input multiple-output，SU-MIMO)场景下，发射端，例如基站仅与一个接收端(终端)进行通信，时频资源内仅传输该终端的信息(RS、控制信令、数据等)。此时，终端可以根据自己的信息(如自己的端口、层数等信息)直接得知自己的DMRS的RE位置，在数据译码时避开这些RE。因此在SU时候并不存在DMRS的rate matching问题。
本申请实施例的第二方面，还提供了一种DMRS速率匹配指示和接收方法，其包括：
使用2PDCCH场景下的non-QCL组的2个TRP，每个TRP静默非自己使用的QCL组的DMRS对应的资源单元后进行数据传输，其中一个TRP可以有一个或者多个QCL组的DMRS；这种行为可以为默认操作；
在1PDCCH场景中，则需要发射端向接收端发送DMRS指示信息，该DMRS指示信息指示本发射端使用的一个或多个QCL组内的DMRS对应的资源单元。
2PDCCH场景或1PDCCH场景下，发射端通知接收端也有两种方式：
第一种，发射端给接收端发送DMRS指示信息，在2PDCCH场景下，DMRS指示信息指示该TRP的可使用的DMRS端口内的当前量化的传输层数，或者在1PDCCH场景下，当前系统中协作的TRP可以使用的总层数。
第二种，在2PDCCH场景下，对于不同的DMRS图样，接收端可以使用DMRS图样对应的包含有DMRS指示信息的DMRS配置信息表，进行速率匹配，需要注意的是，这里的DMRS图样是指该TRP可使用的QCL组内的DMRS端口所构成的DMRS图样。或者1PDCCH场景下，协作的TRP可以使用的多个QCL组DMRS端口所构成的DMRS图样。
需要说明的是，所述的多个DMRS配置信息表还可以是一张信息总表，该一张信息总表支持最大端口数，多个DMRS配置信息表是该信息总表的子集，从该信息总表中选取子集可以依据最大可支持端口数或者DMRS图样或者是高层信令进行选择。
在DMRS指示信息指示的是所述DMRS天线端口集合信息这种实现方式中，所述DMRS天线端口集合信息是指根据当前系统所调度的实际DMRS层数，指示被占用的DMRS天线端口组状态，比如端口组1为{1，2，3，4}，端口组2为{5，6，7，8}，假设基站按照DMRS端口号从小到大顺序调度，当调度层数为4层时，指示端口组1被占用，当大于4层时，指示端口组1和2被占用。这里仅给出例子，具体的端口号分组和基站调度不作限定。
在DMRS指示信息指示的是所述的DMRS天线端口的码分复用CDM组信息这种实现方式中，码分复用CDM组信息包括非所述接收端自身使用的DMRS天线端口的CDM端口组信息，或接收端自身使用的DMRS天线端口组信息和非所述接收端自身使用的DMRS天线端口组信息之和。
其中，非自身使用的DMRS CDM端口组信息，可以包括以下状态的至少一种：
1、所有DMRS RE位置可以传输数据(SU)；
2、所有DMRS RE位置被占用(MU)，此种情况包括接收端使用1(或2个)DMRS端口CDM组，且另外2个(或1个)被占用，或者接收端使用2个DMRS端口CDM组，且另外1个被占用。
Mute非接收端自身的2个端口组中较大的一个(MU，UE使用1个端口组)；
4、Mute非接收端自身的2个端口组中较小的一个(MU，UE使用1个端口组)；
应理解的是，“较大、较小”：可以定义为2个CDM端口组内最大或最小的端口号之间的比较(即利用非UE自身DMRS端口组的相对关系)
具体实施中，对于状态3和4，也可以不存在“较大、较小”的比较过程，比如可以为端口组内包含的端口号，或者为端口组的编号。
非自身使用的DMRS CDM端口组信息可以与DMRS类型绑定(DMRS configuration/Type 1/A or 2/B)，或者与pattern包含的CDM组个数绑定(2个或者3个)。
这种指示非接收端自身使用的DMRS端口组状态的方式可以进一步减少指令开销，并且这种方式还可以支持多种场景，通用性较好。例如，可以直接支持1PDCCH NC-JT，dynamic TDD；2PDCCH NC-JT，对于现有的指令的改动较少。
另一方面，本申请实施例提供了发射端，该发射端包括：
处理器，发射端从多组解调参考信号DMRS配置信息中确定与当前DMRS传输方案对应的DMRS配置信息，并根据DMRS配置信息得到DMRS指示信息；所述每组DMRS配置信息包含多条DMRS配置信息；收发器，发送所述DMRS指示信息。
另一方面，本申请实施例提供了一种发射端，包括：
处理器，生成解调参考信号DMRS指示信息；所述DMRS指示信息与最大可支持端口数或DMRS图样对应，或DMRS配置类型对应；
收发器，发送所述DMRS指示信息。
另一方面，本申请提供了一种接收端，包括：
收发器，接收发射端发送的解调参考信号DMRS指示信息；所述DMRS指示信息是发射端根据DMRS配置信息得到的，所述DMRS配置信息是发射端根据当前DMRS传输方案从多组解调参考信号DMRS配置信息中确定的；所述每组DMRS配置信息包含多条DMRS配置信息；
处理器，根据收发器接收的所述DMRS指示信息，得到DMRS配置信息并辅助解调数据。
再一方面，本申请提供了另一种发射端，包括：
处理器，生成解调参考信号DMRS指示信息；所述DMRS指示信息用于指示可用于承载DMRS的资源中未被DMRS占用的资源；
收发器，发送所述DMRS指示信息。
再一方面，本申请提供了另一种接收端，包括：
收发器，用于接收解调参考信号DMRS指示信息；所述DMRS指示信息用于指示可用于承载DMRS的资源中未被DMRS占用的资源；
处理器，用于根据所述DMRS指示信息，在未被DMRS占用的资源上进行数据解调。
应用于上行传输场景时，上述装置可以是终端；应用于下行传输场景时，该装置 可以是网络设备，该网络侧设备可以是一种基站，也可以是一种控制节点。
这种网络侧设备可以包括作为对传统无线电信系统中的对等设备的改进的系统和设备。这种高级或下一代设备可以包含在演进无线通信标准(例如长期演进(LTE))中。
另一方面，本申请实施例提供了一种基站，该基站具有实现上述方法实际中基站行为的功能。所述功能可以通过硬件实现，也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。
在一个可能的设计中，基站的结构中包括处理器和收发器，所述处理器被配置为支持基站执行上述方法中相应的功能。所述收发器用于支持基站与终端之间的通信，向终端发送上述方法中所涉及的信息或者信令，接收基站所发送的信息或指令。所述基站还可以包括存储器，所述存储器用于与处理器耦合，其保存基站必要的程序指令和数据。
应用于上行传输场景时，该装置可以是网络设备；应用于下行传输场景时，该装置是终端，该终端具有实现上述方法设计中终端行为的功能。所述功能可以通过硬件实现，终端的结构中包括收发器和处理器。也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。所述模块可以是软件和/或硬件。
再一方面，本申请实施例还提供一种处理装置，包括处理器和接口；
所述处理器为前述发射端或接收端中处理器；
所述处理装置可以是一个芯片，所述处理器可以通过硬件来实现也可以通过软件来实现，当通过硬件实现时，该处理器可以是逻辑电路、集成电路等；当通过软件来实现时，该处理器可以是一个通用处理器，通过读取存储器中存储的软件代码来实现，改存储器可以集成在处理器中，可以位于所述处理器之外，独立存在。
又一方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信系统，该系统包括上述方面所述的基站和终端。可选地，还可以包括上述实施例中的控制节点。
再一方面，本申请实施例提供了一种计算机存储介质，用于储存为上述基站所用的计算机软件指令，其包含用于执行上述方面所设计的程序。
再一方面，本申请实施例提供了一种计算机存储介质，用于储存为上述终端所用的计算机软件指令，其包含用于执行上述方面所设计的程序。
实施本申请提供的发送解调参考信号的方法和装置，以及获取解调参考信号的方法和装置，通过多个DMRS配置信息与NR的多种场景进行匹配，可以满足更高层数据传输的需求，并且该多个信息表支持切换，可以进一步降低指示开销。
本发明实施例的第一方面，提供一种数据发送方法，所述方法用于通过多个解调参考信号DMRS端口向一个接收端设备发送多个数据流，其中所述多个DMRS端口分属至少两个端口组，每个端口组中的各个DMRS端口之间满足准共址QCL关系，每个端口组中的任一DMRS端口与任一其他端口组中的任一DMRS端口满足非准共址Non-QCL关系；所述多个DMRS端口被分配给至少两个发射端设备，每一发射端设备分配到的DMRS端口属于同一个端口组，所述方法包括：
在一种可能的设计中，每一发射端设备将一个码字映射为该发射端设备分配到的DMRS端口对应的数据流；
每一发射端设备将该发射端设备分配到的DMRS端口对应的数据流发送给所述接收端设备。
在一种可能的设计中，所述至少两个发射端设备为同一发射端设备的至少两块天线面板，
每一发射端设备将一个码字映射为该发射端设备分配到的DMRS端口对应的数据流具体为，对于每一天线面板，所述同一发射端设备将一个码字映射为该天线面板分配到的DMRS端口对应的数据流；
每一发射端设备将该发射端设备分配到的DMRS端口对应的数据流发送给所述接收端设备具体为，每一天线面板将该天线面板分配到的DMRS端口对应的数据流发送给所述接收端设备。
在一种可能的设计中，在所述每一发射端设备将一个码字映射为该发射端设备分配到的DMRS端口对应的数据流之前，所述方法还包括，所述至少两个发射端设备中的一个发射端设备向所述接收端设备发送一指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示为所述接收端设备分配的所述多个DMRS端口。
在一种可能的设计中，在所述每一发射端设备将一个码字映射为该发射端设备分配到的DMRS端口对应的数据流之前，所述方法还包括，所述同一发射端设备向所述接收端设备发送一指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示为所述接收端设备分配的所述多个DMRS端口。
在本发明实施例的各个方面和各种可能的设计中，所述多个数据流的数量(也就是所述多个DMRS端口的数量)小于等于4，但也可以不限于此。例如，本发明实施例提供的技术方案可以应用于数据流的数量小于等于4的场景，而不应用于数据流的数量大于4的场景。更进一步的说，在数据流的数量小于等于4的场景中，本发明实施例提供的技术方案可以应用于数据流的数量为3和/或4的场景(即所述多个数据流的数量为3和/或4)，而不应用于所述多个数据流的数量为2的场景。当然本发明实施例提供的技术方案也可以不受上述场景的限制。
根据本发明实施例的第二方面，提供一种数据接收方法，包括：
通过多个DMRS端口接收多个数据流，其中，所述多个DMRS端口分属至少两个端口组，每个端口组中的各个DMRS端口之间满足准共址QCL关系，每个端口组中的任一DMRS端口与任一其他端口组中的任一DMRS端口满足非准共址Non-QCL关系；
对于所述至少两个端口组中的每个端口组，接收端设备根据所述多个DMRS端口中处于该端口组中的DMRS端口所对应的数据流，恢复出一个码字。
在一种可能的设计中，在接收所述多个数据流之前，所述方法还包括：
接收一指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示所述多个DMRS端口。
在一种可能的设计中，所述多个数据流的数量(也就是所述多个DMRS端口的数量)小于等于4，但也可以不限于此。例如，本发明实施例提供的技术方案可以应用于数据流的数量小于等于4的场景，而不应用于数据流的数量大于4的场景。更进一步的说，在数据流的数量小于等于4的场景中，本发明实施例提供的技术方案可以应用于数据流的数量为3和/或4的场景(即所述多个数据流的数量为3和/或4)，而不 应用于所述多个数据流的数量为2的场景。当然本发明实施例提供的技术方案也可以不受上述场景的限制。
根据本发明实施例的第三方面，提供一种数据接收方法，包括：
通过多个DMRS端口接收多个数据流，其中，所述多个DMRS端口属于同一端口组，且该端口组中的各个DMRS端口之间满足准共址QCL关系；
根据所述多个数据流，恢复出一个码字。
在一种可能的设计中，在接收所述多个数据流之前，所述方法还包括：
接收一指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示所述多个DMRS端口。
在一种可能的设计中，所述多个数据流的数量小于等于4。
在上述各个方面和各种可能的设计中，所述指示信息为下行控制信息DCI。
上述数据流又叫数据层。
根据本发明实施例的第四方面，提供一种发射端设备，所述发射端设备用于与至少一个其他发射端设备，通过多个解调参考信号DMRS端口向一个接收端设备发送多个数据流，其中所述多个DMRS端口分属至少两个端口组，每个端口组中的各个DMRS端口之间满足准共址QCL关系，每个端口组中的任一DMRS端口与任一其他端口组中的任一DMRS端口满足非准共址Non-QCL关系；所述多个DMRS端口被分配给所述发射端设备和所述至少一个其他发射端设备，所述发射端设备和所述至少一个其他发射端设备中的每一发射端设备分配到的DMRS端口属于同一个端口组，所述发射端设备包括：
映射模块，用于将一个码字映射为该发射端设备分配到的DMRS端口对应的数据流；
发射模块，用于将该发射端设备分配到的DMRS端口对应的数据流发送给所述接收端设备。
在一种可能的设计中，所述发射端设备和所述至少一个其他发射端设备为同一发射端设备的至少两块天线面板，
所述映射模块设置于所述同一发射端设备内，且所述映射模块具体用于，对于每一天线面板，将一个码字映射为该天线面板分配到的DMRS端口对应的数据流；
所述发射模块设置于所述同一发射端设备内，且所述发射模块具体用于，每一天线面板将该天线面板分配到的DMRS端口对应的数据流发送给所述接收端设备。
在一种可能的设计中，所述发射模块还用于，向所述接收端设备发送一指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示为所述接收端设备分配的所述多个DMRS端口。
在一种可能的设计中，所述多个数据流的数量小于等于4。
根据本发明实施例的第五方面，提供一种接收端设备，包括：
接收模块，用于通过多个DMRS端口接收多个数据流，其中，所述多个DMRS端口分属至少两个端口组，每个端口组中的各个DMRS端口之间满足准共址QCL关系，每个端口组中的任一DMRS端口与任一其他端口组中的任一DMRS端口满足非准共址Non-QCL关系；
恢复模块，用于对于所述至少两个端口组中的每个端口组，根据所述多个DMRS端口中处于该端口组中的DMRS端口所对应的数据流，恢复出一个码字。
在一种可能的设计中，所述接收模块还用于，接收一指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示所述多个DMRS端口。
在一种可能的设计中，所述多个数据流的数量小于等于4。
根据本发明实施例的第六方面，提供一种接收端设备，包括：
接收模块，用于通过多个DMRS端口接收多个数据流，其中，所述多个DMRS端口属于同一端口组，且该端口组中的各个DMRS端口之间满足准共址QCL关系；
恢复模块，用于根据所述多个数据流，恢复出一个码字。
在一种可能的设计中，所述接收模块还用于，接收一指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示所述多个DMRS端口。
在一种可能的设计中，所述多个数据流的数量小于等于4。
在本发明实施例的各个方面及各个设计中，上述指示信息可以为下行控制信息DCI。
根据本发明实施例的第七方面，提供一种数据发送方法，所述方法用于通过多个解调参考信号DMRS端口向一个接收端设备发送多个数据流，其中所述多个DMRS端口分属至少两个端口组，每个端口组中的各个DMRS端口之间满足准共址QCL关系，每个端口组中的任一DMRS端口与任一其他端口组中的任一DMRS端口满足非准共址Non-QCL关系；所述多个DMRS端口被分配给同一发射端设备，对于每一端口组，所述方法包括：
所述发射端设备将一个码字映射为所述多个DMRS端口中处于该端口组中的DMRS端口所对应的数据流；
所述发射端设备将所述数据流发送给所述接收端设备。
在一种可能的设计中，所述方法还包括，所述发射端设备向所述接收端设备发送一指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示为所述接收端设备分配的所述多个DMRS端口。
在一种可能的设计中，所述多个数据流的数量小于等于4。
根据本发明实施例的第八方面，提供一种发射端设备，所述发射端设备用于通过多个解调参考信号DMRS端口向一个接收端设备发送多个数据流，其中所述多个DMRS端口分属至少两个端口组，每个端口组中的各个DMRS端口之间满足准共址QCL关系，每个端口组中的任一DMRS端口与任一其他端口组中的任一DMRS端口满足非准共址Non-QCL关系；所述多个DMRS端口被分配给所述发射端设备，所述发射端设备包括：
映射模块，用于对于每一端口组，将一个码字映射为所述多个DMRS端口中处于该端口组中的DMRS端口所对应的数据流；
发射模块，用于将所述数据流发送给所述接收端设备。
在一种可能的设计中，所述方法还包括，所述发射模块还用于向所述接收端设备发送一指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示为所述接收端设备分配的所述多个DMRS端口。
在一种可能的设计中，所述多个数据流的数量小于等于4。
总体来说，本发明实施例提供了一种数据发送方法，所述方法用于通过多个解调 参考信号DMRS端口向一个接收端设备发送多个数据流，其中所述多个DMRS端口分属至少两个端口组，每个端口组中的各个DMRS端口之间满足准共址QCL关系，每个端口组中的任一DMRS端口与任一其他端口组中的任一DMRS端口满足非准共址Non-QCL关系，对于每个端口组，所述方法包括：
将一个码字映射为所述多个DMRS端口中处于该端口组中的DMRS端口所对应的数据流；
将所述数据流发送给所述接收端设备。
在一种可能的设计中，所述方法还包括，向所述接收端设备发送一指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示为所述接收端设备分配的所述多个DMRS端口。
在一种可能的设计中，所述多个数据流的数量小于等于4。
在一种可能的设计中，上述多个DMRS端口可以分配给同一发射端设备；也可以分配给同一发射端设备的多块天线面板，其中每块天线面板分配到的DMRS端口属于同一端口组；也可以分配给为为同一接收端设备服务(例如基于CoMP(Coordinated Multi-Point，多点协作)相关技术)的多个发射端设备，每个发射端设备分配到的DMRS端口属于同一端口组。此外，上述DMRS端口也可以采用其他方式分配给一个或者多个发射端设备，例如但不限于上述几种方式的各种可行的组合方式。
相应的，本发明实施例还提供了一种数据接收方法，包括：
通过多个DMRS端口接收多个数据流，其中，所述多个DMRS端口属于同一端口组，或者分属至少两个端口组，每个端口组中的各个DMRS端口之间满足准共址QCL关系，每个端口组中的任一DMRS端口与任一其他端口组中的任一DMRS端口满足非准共址Non-QCL关系；
对于所述同一端口组或者至少两个端口组中的每个端口组，接收端设备根据所述多个DMRS端口中处于该端口组中的DMRS端口所对应的数据流，恢复出一个码字。
在一种可能的设计中，在接收所述多个数据流之前，所述方法还包括：
接收一指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示所述多个DMRS端口。
所述多个数据流的数量小于等于4。
不难理解，在接收端设备一侧，接收端设备可以无需关注上述多个DMRS端口来自一个发射端设备，还是来自一个发射端设备的多块天线面板，还是来自多个发射端设备。
QCL(Quasi-Co-Location，准共址)通常用于描述相似的大尺度衰落，以及相似的空间方向(例如但不限于波束方向)等，因此非准共址(Non-Quasi-Co-Location，Non-QCL)通常用于描述不同的大尺度衰落，以及不同的空间方向等。有关QCL和Non-QCL的相关内容已经在现有技术中进行了清楚的描述，因此此处不再赘述。
在实际传输中，信息比特(bit)通常是以传输块(Transport Block，TB)的形式进行划分的，而一个传输块可以是一个码字(codeword，CW)，有关TB和CW的内容可以参考现有技术
通常，可以将系统支持的DMRS端口划分为多个端口组，每个端口组中的各个DMRS端口之间满足QCL关系，每个端口组中的任一DMRS端口与任一其他端口组中的任一DMRS端口满足Non-QCL关系。当多个发射端设备为同一接收端设备服务 时，为每个发射端设备分配的DMRS端口来自同一端口组。例如，可以将DMRS端口0～9划分为2个端口组，分别为端口组1和端口组2，其中DMRS端口0～4属于端口组1，DMRS端口5～9属于端口组2。在为发射端设备分配DMRS端口时，可以将端口组1中的任意数量的DMRS端口分配给发射端设备，也可以将端口组2中的任意数量的DMRS端口分配给发射端设备。此外，无论是多个发射端设备为同一接收端设备服务，还是单个发射端设备为该接收端设备服务，为同一个发射端设备分配的DMRS端口，可以来自相同的端口组，也可以来自不同的端口组。例如，当来自相同的端口组时，可以将上述端口组1中的端口1和端口2分配给该发射端设备；当来自不同的端口组时，可以将上述端口组1中的端口2～3和上述端口组2中的端口8～9分配给该发射端设备。不难理解，当为同一发射端设备分配的DMRS端口来自不同的端口组时，该发射端设备通过不同端口组中的DMRS端口进行的无线传输将具有Non-QCL特性，例如具有不同的大尺度衰落，或者指向不同的空间方向。当为同一发射端设备分配的DMRS端口来自相同的端口组时，该发射端设备通过该相同的端口组中的DMRS端口进行的无线传输将具有QCL特性，例如具有相似的大尺度衰落，或者指向相似的空间方向。
上述将DMRS端口划分为多个端口组的相关内容可以参考现有技术，例如，可以在发射端设备和接收端设备出厂之前，预先在这些设备内设置，也可以由发射端设备将DMRS端口的分组情况提前通知给接收端设备，例如但不限于发射端设备通过RRC(Radio Resource Control，无线资源控制)消息，在例如但不限于接收端设备接入通信网络，或者定期的，通知给接收端设备。在将DMRS端口划分为多个端口组的情况下，可以依照分组情况和具体需要(例如各种应用场景，如CoMP)为发射端设备分配DMRS端口。
多个发射端设备可以为多个发射端设备，也可以为一个同一发射端设备的多块天线面板。上述发射端设备可以是例如但不限于基站。上述接收端设备可以是例如但不限于终端。
码字到数据流的映射过程，以及从数据流恢复出码字的过程，可以参考现有技术。
当多个发射端设备同时为一个接收端设备服务时，上述指示信息可以由多个发射端设备中的一个发射端设备来发送，在这种情况下，发送上述指示信息的发射端设备可以称为服务设备，其他发射端设备可以称为协作设备。
上述数据流又可以称为数据层，其通常可通过对码字进行层映射来获得，具体过程可以参考现有技术。
上述方法中的步骤可以通过一个或者多个处理器来执行，有可以通过一个或者多个处理器执行程序来执行。
上述发射端设备和接收端设备中的各个模块的功能可以集成在一个或者多个处理器上来执行，也可以通过一个或者多个处理器执行程序来执行。
附图说明
为了更清楚地说明本申请实施例的技术方案，下面将对本申请实施例中所需要使用的附图作简单地介绍，显而易见地，下面所描述的附图仅仅是本申请的一些实施例， 对于本领域普通技术人员来讲，在不付出创造性劳动的前提下，还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。
图1为现有技术提供的一种导频图的示意图；
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种资源单元的示意图；
图3为本申请实施例提供的技术方案所适用的一种系统架构的示意图；
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种基站的结构示意图；
图5为本申请实施例提供的一种终端的结构示意图；
图6为本申请实施例提供的一种DMRS指示和接收方法的交互示意图；
图7是本申请实施例提供的一种DMRSpattern的示意图；
图8是本申请实施例提供的又一DMRS pattern的示意图；
图9是本申请实施例提供的又一DMRS pattern的示意图；
图10是本申请实施例提供的又一DMRS pattern的示意图；
图11为本申请实施例提供的又一DMRSpattern的示意图；
图12为本申请实施例提供的又一DMRSpattern的示意图；
图13为本申请实施例提供的又一DMRSpattern的示意图；
图14为本申请实施例提供的又一DMRSpattern的示意图；
图15为本申请实施例提供的又一DMRSpattern的示意图；
图16为本申请实施例提供的又一DMRSpattern的示意图；
图17为本申请实施例提供的又一DMRSpattern的示意图；
图18为本申请实施例提供的又一DMRSpattern的示意图；
图19为本申请实施例提供的又一DMRSpattern的示意图；
图20是LTE系统中MU-MIMO场景示意图；
图21为本申请实施例提供的一种DMRS指示方法和接收方法的又一交互流程示意图；
图22为本申请实施例提供的一种DMRS指示方法和接收方法的一个场景示意图；
图23为本申请实施例提供的一种DMRS指示方法和接收方法中指示信息与pattern对应的一个示意图；
图24为本申请实施例提供的一种DMRS指示方法和接收方法的又一场景示意图；
图25为本申请实施例提供的一种DMRS指示方法和接收方法中指示信息与pattern对应的又一示意图。
图26为本申请实施例提供的一种DMRS指示方法和接收方法的又一场景示意图；
图27为本申请实施例提供的一种DMRS指示方法和接收方法中指示信息与pattern对应的又一示意图。
图28为本申请实施例提供的一种DMRS指示方法和接收方法的又一场景示意图；
图29为本申请实施例提供的一种DMRS指示方法和接收方法中指示信息与pattern对应的又一示意图。
图30为本申请实施例提供的一种DMRS指示方法和接收方法中指示信息与pattern对应的又一示意图。
图31为本申请实施例提供的一种DMRS指示方法和接收方法中指示信息与pattern 对应的又一示意图。
图32为本申请实施例提供的一种DMRS指示方法和接收方法中指示信息与pattern对应的又一示意图。
图33为本申请实施例提供的一种DMRS指示方法和接收方法中指示信息与pattern对应的又一示意图。
图34为本申请实施例提供的一种DMRS指示方法和接收方法中指示信息与pattern对应的又一示意图。
图35为本申请实施例提供的一种DMRS指示方法和接收方法中又一应用场景示意图；
图36为本申请实施例提供的一种DMRS指示方法和接收方法中指示信息与pattern对应的又一示意图；
图37为本申请实施例提供的一种DMRS指示方法和接收方法中指示信息与pattern对应的又一示意图；
图38为本申请实施例提供的一种DMRS指示方法和接收方法的一个场景示意图。
图39为本申请实施例提供的一种DMRS指示方法和接收方法中指示信息与pattern对应的又一示意图；
图40为本申请实施例提供的一种DMRS指示方法和接收方法中指示信息与pattern对应的又一示意图；
图41为本申请实施例提供的发射端的模块示意图；
图42为本申请实施例提供的接收端的模块示意图；
图43为本申请实施例提供的发射端或接收端的示意图。
具体实施方式
首先，对本文中涉及的相关术语进行简单介绍，以方便读者理解：
1)、资源单元(resource unit)
类似于LTE标准中的RB和RB对(RB pair)，在本申请的一些实施例中提供了一种资源单元，该资源单元可以作为调度终端进行资源分配的基本单位，也可以用于描述多种参考信号的排布方式。
资源单元可以由频域上连续的多个子载波和时域上的一个时间间隔(time interval，TI)组成。不同调度过程中，资源单元的大小可以相同，也可以不同。其中，这里的TI可以是LTE系统中的传输时间间隔(transmission time interval，TTI)，也可以是符号级短TTI，或高频系统中的大子载波间隔的短TTI，也可以是5G系统中的slot或微型时隙(mini-slot)等。本申请对此不做限定。
可选的，一个资源单元可以包括一个或多个RB，一个或多个RB pair等，另外还可以是半个RB等。另外还可以是其他的时频资源，本申请对此不进行限定。其中，一个RB pair是由频域上的12个连续的子载波和时域上的一个子帧组成。频域上的一个子载波和时域上的一个符号组成的时频资源为一个资源元素(resource element，RE)，如图2所示。其中，图2中的RB pair由频域上的12个连续的子载波(编号为0～11)和时域上的14个符号(编号为0～13)组成。图2中，横坐标表示时域，纵坐标表示频域。需要 说明的是，本申请中的包含表示时域资源的附图均是基于图2所示的RB pair为例进行说明的，本领域技术人员可以理解的，具体实现时，不限于此。可以理解的，本申请中的“符号”可以包括但不限于以下任一种：正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing，OFDM)符号、通用滤波多载波(universal filtered multi-carrier，UFMC)信号，滤波器组多载波(filter-band multi-carrier，FBMC)符号，广义频分多工(generalized frequency-division multiplexing，GFDM)符号等。
2)、DMRS端口组
本申请中涉及的“DMRS端口组”是为了清楚地描述本申请提供的技术方案而引入的一个逻辑概念，具体的，是为了清楚地描述本申请中提供的导频图或其变型而引入的一个逻辑概念。可以理解的，在实际实现时，基站和终端可以不执行对DMRS端口分组这一动作，通过任意方式设计出如本申请中描述的导频图或者其变型，均应属于本申请保护范围之内。
一个DMRS端口组可以包括一个或多个DMRS端口。本申请中，DMRS端口组中的各端口对应的DMRS之间通过CDM方式复用相同的时频资源，如正交掩码(orthogonal cover code，OCC)、循环移位(cyclic shift，CS)，或循环相位旋转(cyclic phase rotations)等方法，或者以上多种方法的组合，如OCC+CS。有关多个参考信号借助CDM方式复用时频资源的技术方案在现有技术中已经进行了清楚的描述，本文不再赘述。
3)系统支持的DMRS端口port
系统支持的DMRS端口，可以认为是基站可使用的DMRS端口。实际实现时，基站可能使用其支持的部分或全部DMRS端口调度终端。最大可支持的正交端口数，即是指的系统或基站可支持的DMRS正交端口数的最大值。
本申请中，以系统支持的DMRS端口的数目为4、6、8、12为例进行说明。
4)其他术语
本文中的术语“多个”是指两个或两个以上。
本文中的术语“第一”、“第二”等仅是为了区分不同的对象，并不对其顺序进行限定。例如，第一符号组和第二符号组仅仅是为了区分不同的符号组，并不对其先后顺序进行限定。
本文中术语“和/或”，仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况。另外，本文中字符“/”，一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。
下面结合附图对本申请提供的技术方案进行介绍。
本申请提供的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统，例如当前2G，3G，4G通信系统，以及未来演进网络，如5G通信系统。例如，LTE系统，第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project，3GPP)相关的蜂窝系统等，以及其他此类通信系统。尤其地，可以应用于5G NR系统中。
需要说明的是，5G标准中可以包括机器对机器(machine to machine，M2M)、设备对机器(devoice to machine，D2M)、宏微通信、增强型移动互联网(enhance mobile broadband，eMBB)、超高可靠性与超低时延通信(ultra reliable & low latency communication，uRLLC)以及海量物联网通信(massive machine type communication， mMTC)等场景，这些场景可以包括但不限于：终端与终端之间的通信场景，基站与基站之间的通信场景，基站与终端之间的通信场景等。本申请实施例提供的技术方案也可以应用于5G通信系统中的终端与终端之间的通信，或基站与基站之间的通信等场景中。
本申请实施例提供的技术方案可以应用于如图3所示的系统架构中，该系统架构中可以包括基站100以及与基站100连接的一个或多个终端200。
在一个示例中，基站100可以通过如图4所示的结构实现。
其中，基站100可以是能和终端200通信的设备。基站100可以是中继站或接入点等。基站100可以是全球移动通信系统(global system for mobile communication，GSM)或码分多址(code division multiple access，CDMA)网络中的基站收发信台(base transceiver station，BTS)，也可以是宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access，WCDMA)中的NB(NodeB)，还可以是LTE中的eNB或eNodeB(evolutional NodeB)。基站100还可以是云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network，CRAN)场景下的无线控制器。基站100还可以是未来5G网络中的网络设备或未来演进的PLMN网络中的网络设备；还可以是可穿戴设备或车载设备等。
终端200可以是用户设备(user equipment，UE)、接入终端、UE单元、UE站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、UE终端、终端、无线通信设备、UE代理或UE装置等。接入终端可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol，SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop，WLL)站、个人数字处理(personal digital assistant，PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备，未来5G网络中的终端或者未来演进的PLMN网络中的终端等。
基站100的通用硬件架构进行说明。如图4所示，基站可以包括室内基带处理单元(building baseband unit，BBU)和远端射频模块(remote radio unit，RRU)，RRU和天馈系统(即天线)连接，BBU和RRU可以根据需要拆开使用。应注意，在具体实现过程中，基站100还可以采用其他通用硬件架构，而并非仅仅局限于图4所示的通用硬件架构。
以终端200为手机为例，对手机的通用硬件架构进行说明。如图5所示，手机可以包括：射频(radio Frequency，RF)电路110、存储器120、其他输入设备130、显示屏140、传感器150、音频电路160、I/O子系统170、处理器180、以及电源190等部件。本领域技术人员可以理解，图5所示的手机的结构并不构成对手机的限定，可以包括比图示更多或者更少的部件，或者组合某些部件，或者拆分某些部件，或者不同的部件布置。本领域技术人员可以理解显示屏140属于用户界面(user Interface，UI)，显示屏140可以包括显示面板141和触摸面板142。且手机可以包括比图示更多或者更少的部件。尽管未示出，手机还可以包括摄像头、蓝牙模块等功能模块或器件，在此不再赘述。
进一步地，处理器180分别与RF电路110、存储器120、音频电路160、I/O子系统170、以及电源190均连接。I/O子系统170分别与其他输入设备130、显示屏140、传感器150均连接。其中，RF电路110可用于收发信息或通话过程中，信号的接收和发送，特别地，将基站的下行信息接收后，给处理器180处理。存储器120可用于存储软件程序以 及模块。处理器180通过运行存储在存储器120的软件程序以及模块，从而执行手机的各种功能应用以及数据处理。其他输入设备130可用于接收输入的数字或字符信息，以及产生与手机的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。显示屏140可用于显示由用户输入的信息或提供给用户的信息以及手机的各种菜单，还可以接受用户输入。传感器150可以为光传感器、运动传感器或者其他传感器。音频电路160可提供用户与手机之间的音频接口。I/O子系统170用来控制输入输出的外部设备，外部设备可以包括其他设备输入控制器、传感器控制器、显示控制器。处理器180是手机200的控制中心，利用各种接口和线路连接整个手机的各个部分，通过运行或执行存储在存储器120内的软件程序和/或模块，以及调用存储在存储器120内的数据，执行手机200的各种功能和处理数据，从而对手机进行整体监控。电源190(比如电池)用于给上述各个部件供电，优选的，电源可以通过电源管理系统与处理器180逻辑相连，从而通过电源管理系统实现管理充电、放电、以及功耗等功能。
本申请提供的技术方案可以用于单载波传输场景中，也可以用于多载波传输场景中，也可以适用于多种波形混合传输场景；可以应用于上行传输场景中，也可以应用于下行传输场景中，或者上行和下行同时传输的场景。
下面对本申请提供的传输DMRS的方法进行说明，其中，传输DMRS的方法可以包括发射端发送DMRS的方法，以及接收端获取DMRS的方法。
如图6所示，为本申请提供的一种传输DMRS的方法。该方法可以包括：
S101：发射端从多组解调参考信号DMRS配置信息中确定与当前DMRS传输方案对应的DMRS配置信息，并根据DMRS配置信息得到DMRS指示信息；所述每组DMRS配置信息包含多条DMRS配置信息。
其中，该多个DMRS配置信息可以DMRS配置信息表的形式呈现，一种方式是以多张独立的表格的形式呈现，也可以是属于一张信息总表的子集。
S102：发射端通过时频资源发送DMRS指示信息。
S103：接收端接收所述DMRS指示信息。
S104：接收端根据接收的所述DMRS指示信息，进行信道估计或辅助解调数据。
其中，用于承载DMRS的时频资源在时域上可以包括一个或多个符号，在频域上可以包括一个或多个子载波。
若该技术方案应用于上行传输场景中，则发射端可以是终端，接收端可以是基站。若该技术方案应用于下行传输场景中，则发射端可以是基站，接收端可以是终端。
本申请实施例中，当前的DMRS传输方案是通过指示信息来指示的；不同的DMRS传输方案对应的最大可支持正交端口数不同，或对应的DMRS图样或对应的DMRS配置类型不同。
所述不同的DMRS传输方案对应的DMRS配置信息中的最大可支持正交端口数不同。
所述不同的DMRS传输方案对应的DMRS指示信息的长度不同。
所述至少一条DMRS配置信息中的多个DMRS端口分属不同的码分多址CDM组，其中不同的CDM组之间满足非准共址QCL关系。
针对不同的最大可支持正交端口数，可以配置不同的DMRS配置信息，例如，对 于最大可支持正交端口数为4，正交端口数为6，正交端口数为8，正交端口数为12的MIMO场景，分别配置对应的DMRS配置信息，该DMRS配置信息是让接收端知道其能使用的DMRS正交端口号，序列配置，复用方式等等，以进行正确的数据译码。
另一种实现方式中，该DMRS配置信息针对不同的DMRS图样来配置的，一般来讲，一种DMRS图样就对应着一种支持最大可支持正交端口数或者最大可支持正交传输层数的MIMO场景，该DMRS图样示意出其支持多少个正交的正交端口组，每一个正交端口组由多少个资源单元组成，因此针对不同的DMRS图样配置不同的DMRS配置信息，也可以让接收端知道知道其能使用的DMRS正交端口号，序列配置，复用方式等等，以进行正确的数据译码。
在第一方面的一种实现方式中，DMRS配置信息可以是由协议约定表格来呈现的，其具体实现形式可以是下行控制信息(downlink control information，DCI)表(table)，多张DCI table至少含有一种不同的DMRS配置信息；与DMRS配置信息对应的DMRS传输方案是通过高层信令例如例如无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)信令发送的，当然也可以和场景对应的其他配置参数绑定，如频点，载波间隔、帧结构等。DMRS指示信息即可通过DCI信令或媒体接入控制控制单元(media access control control element，MAC CE)发送。
在具体实现中，每一张DMRS配置信息表对应不同的最大可支持正交端口(port)数，例如最大可支持正交端口数可以是{4、6、8、12}中的至少两种；
在另一种实现方式中，每一张DMRS配置信息表可以对应不同的DMRS图样(pattern)或者DMRS配置类型(configuration type)。
在一种实现方式中，所述信息表中，依据按照正交端口组合进行分列设计，例如小于或等于4层传输层的正交端口组合，与大于4层传输层的正交端口组合分列设计；
在一种实现方式中，所述DMRS配置信息以DMRS配置信息表的形式呈现的时候，可以依据码字数量(codeword number)进行划分，也可以不依据码字数量进行划分，而是依据总的最大可支持正交端口数或依据接收端的传输层数进行分列，具体的可以按照某种比例进行划分。
所述DMRS配置信息中还包括总正交端口数的指示信息，该指示信息可以指示实际可能出现的所有正交端口数，或者实际可能出现的所有正交端口数的量化值。所有正交端口数的量化值可以是DMRS正交层数信息，或者是DMRS天线正交端口集合指示信息，或者DMRS天线正交端口的CDM组信息，或者是依据CDM大小生成的信息。应理解的是，总正交端口数与总正交DMRS传输层数相同。
之所以用DMRS正交传输层数的量化值，是因为如果要指示接收端具体的正交传输层数，例如指示正交传输层数{1，2，3，4}，需要4个bits来进行指示，而将正交传输层数{1，2，3，4}量化成一个值，例如向上量化成正交传输层数4，或者向下量化成正交传输层数1，或者用2或3来表示改组正交传输层数{1，2，3，4，}则指示正交传输层数的量化值只需要一个bit就可以指示了，例如用0表示正交传输层数的量化值4，因此可以减少指示开销。
需要说明的是，所述的多个DMRS配置信息表可以是一张信息总表，该一张信息总表支持最大可支持正交端口数，多个DMRS配置信息表是该信息总表的子集，从该 信息总表中选取子集可以依据最大可支持正交端口数或者DMRS图样或者是高层信令进行选择。
需要说明的是，所述的多个DMRS配置信息表可以是一张信息总表，该一张信息总表支持最大可支持正交端口数，多个DMRS配置信息表是该信息总表的子集，从该信息总表中选取子集可以依据最大可支持正交端口数或者DMRS图样或者是高层信令进行选择。
以下将说明本申请提供的发送DMRS和获取DMRS的具体实现过程。
实施例一
本实施例一中设计了多个DMRS配置信息的表，简称为DMRS配置信息表，每一张DMRS配置信息表与最大可支持正交端口数关联，或者针对不同的DMRS pattern，或者针对不同的DMRS配置类型，设计不同的DMRS配置信息表；最大可支持正交端口数，或者DMRS pattern，或者DMRS配置类型都能表示DMRS传输方案；在传输之前，根据不同的pattern配置信息选择或者在不同DMRS配置信息表中进行切换。
如图7所示，该DMRS配置信息表是以SU或MU-MIMO中，单个终端(UE)最大可支持正交端口数为4设计的DMRS配置信息表。
表1
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000001
其中DMRS指示信息或索引用Value表示；当Value＝0时，其表示终端支持传输层(表格中用秩Rank来表示)的个数为1，其对应的正交端口索引(port index)为传输层1，端口号为0；又如，DMRS指示信息Value＝7时，其表示终端支持传输层(Rank)为4，其对应的正交端口索引(port index)为0-3(port 0-3)。
如表1所示的表格所列port组合基本可以覆盖4port及以下所有配置，其中reserved可以用于额外组合(combination)，来增加调度灵活性，尽管已列组合已能满足调度需求。
表1所示的DMRS配置信息表适用于正交DMRS实现最大4流/层数据传输或者图7对应的pattern(如左边部分所示的config.1 1符号或者右边部分所示的config.1 2符号 但采用时域repetition，e.g.，TD-OCC{(1，1)，(1，1)})
本实施例中的DMRS配置信息表按照LTE表格设计(即，以codeword个数划分列)，对应的value值需要3bit的指示开销。
应理解的是，该DMRS配置信息表中的port index只是一种表示方式，仅为举例说明，还可以根据实际需求以其他数字表示。
如表2所示，该DMRS配置信息表是以SU或MU-MIMO中，单个终端(UE)最大可支持正交端口数为6设计的DMRS配置信息表。
表2
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000002
其中DMRS配置信息的指示信息或索引用Value表示；例如，DMRS配置信息的指示信息Value＝0时，其表示终端支持传输层(Rank)的个数为1，其对应的正交端口索引(port index)为0；DMRS配置信息的指示信息Value＝10时，其表示的终端支持传输层(Rank)的个数为3，其对应的正交端口索引(port index)为3～5；需要说明的是，这里的正交端口索引仅为举例，具体的正交端口号可以以其他数字表示。
如表2所示的表格所列port组合基本可以覆盖6port及以下所有配置，其中reserved可以用于额外组合(combination)，来增加调度灵活性，尽管已列组合已能满足调度需求。
如表2所示的DMRS配置信息表适用于正交DMRS实现最大6流/层数据传输或者图8对应的pattern(如左边部分所示的config.1 1符号或者右边部分所示的config.1 2符号但采用时域repetition，e.g.，TD-OCC{(1，1)，(1，1)})。
本实施例中的DMRS配置信息表按照LTE表格设计(即，以codeword个数划分列)，对应的value值需要4bit的指示开销。
如表3所示，该DMRS配置信息表是以SU或MU-MIMO中，单个终端(UE)最大可支持正交端口数为8设计的DMRS配置信息表。
表3
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000003
其中DMRS配置信息的指示信息用Value表示；例如，DMRS配置信息的指示信息Value＝0时，其表示终端支持传输层(Rank)的个数为1，其对应的正交端口索引(port index)为0；又如，当Value＝15时，其表示终端支持传输层(Rank)的个数为4，其对应的正交端口索引(port index)为4～7；需要说明的是，这里的正交端口索引仅为举例，具体的正交端口号可以以其他数字表示。
如表3所示的表格所列port组合基本可以覆盖8port及以下所有配置，其中reserved可以用于额外组合(combination)，来增加调度灵活性，尽管已列组合已能满足调度需求。
如表3所示的DMRS配置信息表适用于正交DMRS实现最大8流/层数据传输或者图9对应的pattern(config.1 2符号)。
本实施例中的DMRS配置信息表按照LTE表格设计(即，以codeword个数划分列)，对应的value值需要4bit的指示开销。
如表4所示，该DMRS配置信息表是以SU-MU-MIMO中，单个终端(UE)最大可支持正交端口数为12设计的DMRS配置信息表。
表4
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000004
其中DMRS配置信息的指示信息用Value表示；例如，DMRS配置信息的指示信息Value＝0时，其表示终端支持传输层(Rank)的个数为1，其对应的正交端口索引(port index)为0；又如当DMRS配置信息的指示信息Value＝24时，其表示终端支持传输层(Rank)的个数为4，其对应的正交端口索引(port index)为8～11。需要说明的是，这里的正交端口索引仅为举例，具体的正交端口号可以以其他数字表示。
如表4所示的表格所列port组合基本可以覆盖12port及以下所有配置，其中reserved可以用于额外组合(combination)，来增加调度灵活性，尽管已列组合已能满足调度需求。
如表4所示的DMRS配置信息表适用于正交DMRS实现最大12流/层数据传输或者图10对应的pattern(config.2 2符号)。
本实施例中的DMRS配置信息表按照LTE表格设计(即，以codeword个数划分列)，对应的value值需要5bit的指示开销。
实施上述表1～表4所示的实施例，针对每一最大可支持正交端口数设计对应的DMRS配置信息表，可以满足NR系统中不同场景的需求。例如用于极高可靠性极低时延通信(Ultra-Reliable and Low-Latency Communication，URLLC)场景的pattern而不只是用于增强移动宽带(Enhanced Mobile Broadband，eMBB)的pattern，针对其他不同的pattern重新考虑表格的设计。
本实施例中设计了多个DMRS配置信息表还可以是DMRS pattern配置类型，简称DMRS配置类型(configuration type)来设计的不同的DMRS配置信息表，在传输之前，根据不同的configuration type信息选择或者在不同信息表中进行切换。
configuration type分为两种，与其对应的DMRS配置信息表分别如表3所示的最大8port(configuration type1)和如表4所示的最大12port(configuration type2)两张table相同，在此不再赘述。表1～表4所示的DMRS配置信息表与不同的DMRS pattern对应，或者与系统支持的最大可支持的正交端口数对应，或者与不同的DMRS配置类型，其对应的pattern或者最大可支持的正交端口数4、6、8、12或DMRS配置类型等可以通过显性信令如RRC、MAC CE或DCI指示，也可以和场景对应的其他配置参数绑定，如频点，载波间隔、帧结构等。
实施例二
本实施例中，将描述DMRS配置信息表的分列设计方式，不同于LTE的分列方式，本实施例中，不依据codeword number进行划分，而是基于最大可支持正交端口数按照一定比例进行划分或者将大于正交端口数大于一定数值以及小于等于一定数值的分为左右两列，或者依据接收端的传输层数(即UE RANK)进行分列。
如表5所示，以是最大可支持正交端口数等于12为例进行说明的，该信息表的左边一列是正交端口数小于等于8，而右边一列是正交端口数大于8。
表5
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000006
表5示意是的以最大可支持可支持可支持正交port数/2对信息表进行分列，这只是一种示意，本申请实施例中，还可以有其他的分列方式，如表6和表7所示，是按照UE的传输层数(RANK)来进行的划分，其原则就是尽可能使得表格左右两列的有效信息的行数是均衡的，以此进一步降低存储开销。
表6
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000007
表7
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000008
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000009
实施例三
本实施例中，将多个DMRS配置信息表集成在一张总信息表中，依据最大可支持正交传输层数或者pattern或是高层信令来进行选择，具体如表8-0所示。
表8-0
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000010
表8-0所示的DMRS配置信息表支持的最大正交port数为12，其他的port数，例如4、6、8对应的DMRS配置信息均为该总信息表的子集，在进行DMRS配置信息选择的时候，可以依据最大可支持正交port数或者与pattern绑定，或者根据高层信令 的指示，例如RRC信令，从该总信息表中选择对应的子表。例如，value0-7对应总正交port数为4，value0-13对应总正交port数为6，value0-19对应总正交port数为8，value0-28对应总正交port数为12。
实施本申请提供的上述发送DMRS的方法，通过设计多个DMRS配置信息表，可以为NR DMRS port指示降低开销。
另外，作多个DMRS配置信息表集成在一张总信息表中的具体实现方式，还可以将相同的DMRS配置类型的DMRS配置信息设计到一张总表中，通过DMRS符号信息进行选择。
具体的，在DMRS配置信息表格中可以包含前导(Front-loaded，FL)DMRS的符号信息，如DMRS符号个数，其中表8-1对应FL DMRS configuration type 1，表8-2对应FL DMRS configuration type 2，即每张表格对应不同的FL DMRS type。此外，表格还可以包含CDM组的状态信息(State of CDM group)，该CDM组的状态信息可以用作速率匹配信息。
表8-1和表8-2中的符号个数(symbol number)一列，分别对应1符号和2符号的Type 1 FL DMRS。本申请实施例中，相同FL DMRS configuration type的1符号和2符号FLDMRS的DMRS端口指示信息包含于同一张表格中，其有益效果是可以通过DCI指示表格中不同的状态，从而实现动态的1符号与2符号的FL DMRS之间的切换。
此外，下面给出的仅为一种示例，符号个数的状态为1和2，分别对应1符号FL DMRS和2符号FL DMRS。在一种实现中，符号个数可以表示为0和1，如0对应1符号FL DMRS，1对应2符号FL DMRS，或者1符号表示为single symbol而2符号表示为double symbols。具体实现中可以有多种表示方法，本申请实施例不做限定。
在另一种实现方式中，DMRS配置信息表格中可以不添加symbol number一列，而是直接通过value值进行隐含指示。比如，表8-1和8-2中可以将symbol number一列去除，而其他元素不改变。此时，发射端通过向接收端指示value值，仍然可以完成1符号FL DMRS和2符号FL DMRS的动态切换。
例如，表8-1中value＝18包含了大于3的DMRS端口号，而1符号的FL DMRS type1的端口号为0-3，这样接收端可以知道调用了2符号DMRS图样。一种实现方法中，接收端和发送端可以预先定义某些value是对应1符号FL DMRS图样，而某些value是对应2符号FL DMRS图样，例如表8-1中，可以预先定义value 0-10对应1符号FL DMRS，value＞11对应2符号FL DMRS，此时，对于相同的调度内容，value＝0对应1符号FL DMRS，而value＝11对应2符号FL DMRS。通过指示value 0和value 11，接收端获知当前调用的是1符号FL DMRS图样或者2符号FL DMRS图样。
表8-1 考虑符号数的配置类型1的端口组合示例
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000011
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000012
表8-2 考虑符号数的配置类型2的端口组合示例
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000013
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000014
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000015
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000016
在一种实现方法中，发射端，例如网络侧设备可以在某次调度中仅调度表格的一部分，即子表格或表格的subset，从而节省DCI开销。
在一种实现方式中，子表格的选定可以通过RRC信令进行显性配置，即通过RRC信令指示所述DMRS符号信息，动态调度所述1符号对应的DMRS配置类型或2符号对应的DMRS配置类型。
例如，对于表8-2，RRC信令可以指示激活1符号FL DMRS对应的表格，如8-2中value 0-22项(即symbol number＝1)，或者指示整张表格均可以使用，如表格8-2中所有的行(即symbol number＝1和symbol number＝2)。具体实现中，RRC的信令配置可以通过多种方式实现，比如可以使用独立的RRC信令进行配置或与其他指示FL DMRS信息的RRC信令绑定进行隐性指示。
对于显性指示，可以通过一个独立的RRC信令进行配置。比如RRC中配置set1、set2对应预定义的某些状态集合(如set1对应symbol number＝1的状态，set2对应表格中的全部状态)，或者直接指示前某些状态(value)被激活(比如8-1中通过‘1010/二进制’表示前11项的value 0-10被使用，或者直接指示某个value值，其前面的所有value状态被激活)，或者配置on/off状态进行使能(如off代表仅symbol number＝1的被使用，on代表整张表格被使用)，或者使用bitmap对表格中的每个value进行指示独立指示， 具体RRC配置的方法这里不做限定。
另一种实现方式中，子表格的使能可以与其他RRC信令绑定，比如可以与RRC中指示FL DMRS最大符号个数的参数绑定，如与DL-DMRS-max-len或UL-DMRS-max-len绑定。下面以DL进行示例，当DL-DMRS-max-len＝1的时候，代表FL DMRS最大的符号个数为1，即系统仅调用1符号的FL DMRS，此时，接收端和发送端仅使用表8-2中1符号FL DMRS对应的状态，如value＝0-22。当DL-DMRS-max-len＝2的时候，代表FL DMRS最大的符号个数为2，即系统可以调用1符号的FL DMRS图样和2符号的FL DMRS，此时，接收端和发送端可以使用表8-2中1符号和2符号FL DMRS对应的状态，即整张表格中的状态均可以使用。
此外，当FL DMRS最大符号个数不同时(如RRC信令中的DL-DMRS-max-len或UL-DMRS-max-len等于1或2时)，对应的DMRS端口调度DCI信令长度不同，或比特个数不同，DCI域不同。实施例四
本实施例中将描述本申请提供的方法应用到各种NR场景的具体实现方式。具体的，为在非相关联合传输(Non-coherent joint transmission，NC-JT)2PDCCH或1PDCCH场景下，为两个传输点(TRPs)设置多张与pattern绑定的DMRS配置信息表。
本实施例从不同的DMRS端口组(port group)中选择port组成port combinations，单PDCCH场景中基站需要将这些端口组合通过一个DCI指示给调度UE，而两PDCCH场景中可以将这些端口组合通过两个DCI指示给UE。DMRS port group的划分和pattern configuration以及端口映射方案有关系。如configuration type 1可能存在两种port mapping方案，如图11或图12所示，而configuration type 2可能存在三种port mapping方案，分贝如图13，图14，图15所示。
上述各种port mapping方式分别依据先进行端口码分复用后频分复用，或者先进行端口频分复用后码分复用得到。各种不同的port mapping会得到不同的DMRS port分组，分组依据为进行同组码分复用的port只能位于同一个group内。
如图11的DMRS分组为{(0，2，4，6)，(1，3，5，7)}或各group子集的分组，如{(0，2)，(1，3)}。
图12的DMRS分组为{(0，1，4，6)，(2，3，5，7)}或各group子集的分组。
图13所示的DMRS分组为{(0，1，6，7)，(2，3，4，5，8，9，10，11)}或{(0，1，6，7，4，5，10，11)，(2，3，8，9)}或{(0，1，6，7，2，3，8，9)，(4，5，10，11)}或各group子集的分组。
图14的DMRS分组为{(0，3，6，9)，(1，4，7，10，2，5，8，11)}或{(0，3，6，9，1，4，7，10)，(2，5，8，11)}或{(1，4，7，10)，(0，3，6，9，2，5，8，11)}或各group子集的分组。
图15的DMRS分组为{(0，1，6，9)，(2，3，7，10，4，5，8，11)}或{(0，1，6，9，4，5，8，11)，(2，3，7，10)}或{(4，5，8，11)，(0，1，6，9，2，3，7，10)}或各group子集的分组。
本实施例需要从不同的group中选择port组成port combinations，因而各个不同的port分组则会形成不同的port组合。下面以各种配置下的其中一种port mapping方案为例来设计DMRS配置信息表。
例如，如图16为NC-JT pattern和port mapping示意图，对应的准共址(quasi co-location，QCL)分组情况为TRP1使用端口{0，1，6，9}组成的端口组，TRP2使用端口{2，3，4，5，7，8，10，11}。
为支持如图16所示的NC-JT的1PDCCH场景，表9示意的DMRS配置信息表在表4示意的DMRS配置信息表的基础上，左列增加了value值＝25～32的对应行，右列增加了value值＝4～18的对应行，具体内容参见表9。
表9
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000017
为支持如图16所示的NC-JT的2PDCCH场景，表10示意的DMRS配置信息表在表4示意的DMRS配置信息表的基础上，左列增加了value值＝25～32的对应行，右列增加了value值＝4～7的对应行，具体内容参见表10。
表10
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000018
图17为NC-JT对应的pattern和port mapping的又一示意图，对应的准共址(quasi co-location，QCL)分组情况为TRP1使用端口{0，2，4，6}组成的端口组，TRP2使用端口{1，3，5，7}。
为支持如图17所示的NC-JT的1PDCCH场景，表11示意的DMRS配置信息表在表3示意的DMRS配置信息表的基础上，左列增加了value值＝16～19的对应行，右列增加了value值＝4～10的行，具体内容参见表11。
表11
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000019
为支持如图17所示的NC-JT的2PDCCH场景，表12示意的DMRS配置信息表在表3示意的DMRS配置信息表的基础上，左列增加了value值＝16～23的对应行，具体内容参见表12。
表12
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000020
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000021
图18为NC-JT对应的pattern和port mapping的又一示意图，对应的准共址(quasi co-location，QCL)分组情况为TRP1使用端口{0，1}组成的端口组，TRP2使用端口{2，3，4，5}。
为支持如图18所示的NC-JT的1PDCCH场景，表13示意的DMRS配置信息表在表2示意的DMRS配置信息表的基础上，右列增加了value值＝12～15的对应行。左列增加了value值＝2的对应行，具体内容参见表13。
表13
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000022
为支持如图28所示的NC-JT的2PDCCH场景，表14示意的DMRS配置信息表在表2示意的DMRS配置信息表的基础上，左列增加了value值＝12的对应行，具体 的内容参见表14。
表14
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000023
图19为NC-JT对应的pattern和port mapping的又一示意图，对应的准共址(quasi co-location，QCL)分组情况为TRP1使用端口{0，2}组成的端口组，TRP2使用端口{1，3}。
为支持如图19所示的NC-JT的1PDCCH场景，表15-1示意的DMRS配置信息表在表1示意的DMRS配置信息表的基础上，右列增加了value值＝8的对应行，具体内容参见表15-1。
表15-1
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000024
为支持如图19所示的NC-JT的2PDCCH场景，表15-2示意的DMRS配置信息表在表1示意的DMRS配置信息表的基础上，左列增加了value值＝8～9的对应行，具体的内容参见表15-2。
表15-2
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000025
根据前述实施例一至实施例四中任一个实施例，在针对不同的NR场景或传输需求时，发射端在其中选择合适的DMRS配置信息，并根据选择的DMRS配置信息得到DMRS指示信息后发送至接收端。
接收端在接收到表示DMRS指示信息的value值时，根据该value值所表示的正交传输层数或者正交端口号，或者未被DMRS占用的资源，在相应的时频资源位置上解调参考信号。
为了便于基站调度，在MU-MIMO场景下，对于一个特定的接收端，DMRS端口会首先从一个CDM组内调度，然后再跨CDM组调度，这种调度规则可以被称为CDM优先的调度规则。考虑DMRS port指示表格中同时包含SU和MU的状态，特别的，对于SU-MIMO的调度，不同的调度规则有不同的有益处。下面将给出例子进行具体说明。考虑如下端口映射顺序：
对于1符号DMRS type 1，CDM组1包含端口为{0，1}，CDM组2包含端口为{2，3}；
对于2符号DMRS type 1，CDM组1包含端口为{0，1，4，5}，CDM组2包含端口为{2，3，6，7}；
对于1符号DMRS type 2，CDM组1包含端口为{0，1}，CDM组2包含端口为{2，3}，CDM组3包含端口为{4，5}。
对于2符号DMRS type 2，CDM组1包含端口为{0，1，6，7}，CDM组2包含端口为{2，3，8，9}，CDM组3包含端口为{4，5，10，11}。
对于SU，发送端可以按照如下规则对接收端的DMRS端口进行分配。下面将具体说明，其中值得注意的是，这里仅给出具体的调度规则，当DMRS映射规则改变时，例子中的DMRS端口号分配可能改变，但是调度规则不会改变。
CDM优先调度：对于接收端，DMRS端口优先从一个CDM组中调度，当CDM组中端口号被全部占用后，再从另一个端口组中调度。该方案具有SU调度和MU调度规律相同的优点。下面针对DMRS type给出具体例子，如下例子可以表示为DMRS端口调度表格(如8-1、8-2)中的某一行(value)。
对于1符号DMRS type 1，当接收端被调用2层时，调度端口可以为0，1(或2，3)，即调度端口为同一个CDM组内；当接收端被调用3层时，调度端口可以为0，1，2，即CDM组1被全部调度，然后在调度CDM组2内的端口2。具体表16-1中可以体现为如下行状态信息。
表16-1 DMRS类型1示例
value number of co-scheduled CDM groups UE Rank ports symbol number
X 1 2 0，1 1
Y 2 3 0，1，2 1
对于2符号DMRS type 1而言，当接收端被调用4层时，调度端口可以为0，1，4，5，即调度端口为先从同一个CDM组内调度；当接收端被调用5层时，调度端口可以为0，1，4，5，2，即CDM组1被全部调度，然后在调度CDM组2内的端口。具体如表16-2中可以体现为如下行状态信息：
表16-2 DMRS类型1示例
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000026
对于1符号DMRS type 2而言，当接收端被调用3层时，调度端口可以为0，1，2，即CDM组1被全部占用，然后在调度CDM组2内的端口；当接收端被调用5层时，调度端口可以为0，1，2，3，4，即CDM组1、2被全部占用，然后调度CDM组3内的端口，如表16-3所示：
表16-3 DMRS类型2示例
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000027
对于2符号DMRS type 2而言，当接收端被调用3层时，调度端口可以为0，1，6，即CDM组1被占用，即优先从CDM组1中进行调度；当接收端被调用5层时，调度端口可以为0，1，6，7，2，即CDM组1被全部调度，然后在调度CDM组2内的端口，如表16-4所示：
表16-4 DMRS类型2示例
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000028
FDM优先调度：对于接收端，DMRS端口调度首先跨CDM组调度，当每个CDM组均有端口被调度后，然后再从第一个CDM组中进行调度，然后继续跨CDM组调度。其主要思想是使得每个CDM组内被调度的DMRS端口个数尽量平均。比如当3个端口被调用时，对于type 2，3个CDM组内各调用一个端口。该方案具有SU调度时每个CDM组被使用的 DMRS端口平均的特点，使得每个CDM组内功率更加平均。下面给出的端口号顺序仅为示例以便更好地理解，具体实现时，端口号的书写顺序并没有限定，如0，2，1，3，4可以写为0，1，2，3，4
对于1符号DMRS type 1，当接收端被调用2层时，调度端口可以为0，2，即优先跨CDM组调度端口；当接收端被调用3层时，调度端口可以为0，1，2，即CDM组1、2被各调度1个端口，然后再调用CDM组1内的端口。如表16-5所示：
表16-5 DMRS类型1示例
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000029
对于2符号DMRS type 1而言，当接收端被调用2层时，调度端口可以为0，2，即优先跨CDM组调度；当接收端被调用5层时，调度端口可以为0，2，1，3，4，即被调度的DMRS端口在CDM组内尽量平均分配。如表16-6所示：
表16-6 DMRS类型1示例
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000030
对于1符号DMRS type 2而言，当接收端被调用3层时，调度端口可以为0，2，4，即CDM组1、2、3被全部占用1个DMRS端口；当接收端被调用4层时，调度端口可以为0，2，4，1即CDM组1、2、3均被占用过，然后再重新调度CDM组1内的端口。如表16-7所示：
表16-7 DMRS类型2示例
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000031
对于2符号DMRS type 2而言，当接收端被调用3层时，调度端口可以为0，2，4，；当接收端被调用8层时，调度端口可以为0，1，2，3，4，5，6，8。如表16-8所示：
表16-8 DMRS类型1示例
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000032
此外，对于FDM优先的调度方案，具体实现时，可以对FDM优先调度的CDM组的个数进行限定，以提升SU调度时候的频谱效率。比如，对于DMRS type 2中的3个CDM组，可以限定SU时候对于其中2个CDM组进行FDM优先调度。此时，对于type 2来说，当6层(或者4个DMRS端口)被调用时，调度端口可以为0，1，2，3，6，8，即CDM组1、和2被调度，当8层被调度是，调度端口可以为0，1，2，3，6，7，8，9，即CDM组1和2均被调用3个端口。这种方案的好处是CDM组3可以用来传输数据，提升频谱效率。如表16-9所示：
表16-9 DMRS类型2示例
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000033
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000034
连续端口号调度：对于接收端，DMRS端口按照DMRS端口号的大小依次连续进行调度。无关该方案具有表格设计简便的特点。如3层对应DMRS端口号为0-2，5层对应DMRS端口号为0-4，8层对应DMRS端口为0-7。
具体实施时，以上调度规则可以进行组合、补充、或者同时出现。比如如对于同时包含1符号和2符号DMRS type 1(或type 2)的表格，表格中可以存在CDM优先调度、FDM优先调度、连续端口号调度的状态，以增加系统调度的灵活性。
一种实现方法中，对于相同symbol number相同的调度层数，表格中可以同时包含CDM优先调度和FDM优先调度的两种状态，增加调度灵活、或者频谱效率。如表16-10所示：
表16-10 DMRS类型1示例
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000035
或者，在一种实现方式中，表格中可以对于大于特定调度层数使用连续端口号调度的规则，小于特定调度层数使用FDM或者CDM优先调度规则。如表16-11所示：
表16-11 DMRS类型1示例
value number of co-scheduled CDM groups UE Rank ports symbol number
X 3 3 0，2，4 2
Y 2 8 0-7 2
又或者，表格中可以对于1符号或者2符号FL DMRS配置使用不同的调度规则或多种规则的组合。比如对于type 2的1符号使用先FDM的调度规则，而对于type 2的2符号对于两个CDM组使用先FDM的调度规则，以此提升2符号时候SU调度的频谱效率。如表16-12所示：
表16-12 DMRS类型2示例
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000036
需要注意的是，以上实施例仅给出的SU调度的规则，对于具体的端口映射没有限制，可以理解对，对于具体不同的端口映射顺序，相同的调度规则可以得到不同的被调度DMRS端口号。如CDM组1内端口为{0，1，4，5}，CDM组2内端口为{2，3，6，7}时，按照FDM调度优先原则，6层对应的端口号为0，1，2，3，4，6；而当CDM组1内端口为{0，1，4，6}，CDM组2内端口为{2，3，5，7}时，按照FDM调度优先原则，6层对应的端口号为0，1，2，3，4，5；可以理解的，在不同的端口映射顺序的情况下，以上两种端口号调度的技术本质相同。
综上所述，本申请实施例提供的DMRS配置信息表中，可以添加CDM组信息，或者DMRS的符号信息，或者RMI信息以进行速率匹配。
下面详细对此进行说明。表17-1和表17-2为对应不同DMRS配置(DMRS configuration type)的DMRS端口指示表格(DMRS port assignment table)，其中表16-1对应DMRS type 1，表17-2对应DMRS type 2。这里表17-1和17-2按照codeword个 数分为两列以节省bit开销，具体实现中可以按照其他方式设计表格的结构，这里仅为示例。
本实施例中，假设DMRS type 1和type 2的具体DMRS端口映射规则如下：
对于1符号DMRS type 1，CDM组1包含端口为{0，1}，CDM组2包含端口为{2，3}；
对于2符号DMRS type 1，CDM组1包含端口为{0，1，4，5}，CDM组2包含端口为{2，3，6，7}；
对于1符号DMRS type 2，CDM组1包含端口为{0，1}，CDM组2包含端口为{2，3}，CDM组3包含端口为{4，5}。
对于2符号DMRS type 2，CDM组1包含端口为{0，1，6，7}，CDM组2包含端口为{2，3，8，9}，CDM组3包含端口为{4，5，10，11}。
具体实施中，可以有不同的DMRS端口映射规则，本实施例中仅为便于说明。具体的对于不同的映射规则，表格中调度的规则不会发生改变。
可以看到，对于每种DMRS配置，表格中可以加入DMRS的符号个数信息(symbol number)，以及RMI信息以进行DMRS的速率匹配。
可选的，这里的可以用于DMRS速率匹配的RMI信息可以是当前系统内被占用的CDM组的个数，或者可以为当前系统内CDM组被占用的组合状态，或者可以为被占用的CDM组的序号，表17-1和表17-2中给出的CDM组的个数(number of co-scheduled CDM groups)方式仅为示例。对于CDM组个数或CDM被占用的组合状态两种方法，可以使用前述实施例中方法。对于被占用的CDM组序号方式，一种实现方法为，当1个CDM组被占用时，对应表格中RMI为“1”，表示CDM组1被占用，当2个CDM组被占用时，对应表格中RMI为“1，2”，表示CDM组1、2被占用，当3个CDM组被占用时，对应表格中RMI为“1，2，3”，表示CDM组1、2、3被占用，具体实现时，被占用的CDM组的个数可以和CDM组序号的对应关系发生改变，这里给出的仅为示例。
可选的，表格中添加了DMRS的符号信息，一种实现方法中，可以在某次调度中仅使用表格中的一部分，以节省DCI的开销。比如，当系统当前DMRS最大符号个数为1符号时，在某次调度中仅配置表格中1符号对应的状态，即symbol number ＝1对应的状态，当系统通知当前DMRS最大符号个数为2时，配置表格中的全部状态。该表格配置的方法可以为前面实施例中给出的方案，如使用独立的RRC信令选择表格的一部分，如symbol number ＝1对应的状态，或者与表格的配置可以与DMRS最大符号个数的信令绑定，具体实现可以使用上面实施例中的方法，这里不再重复。另一种实现方法中，表格中可以不包括DMRS符号个数信息，即symbol number一列，DMRS符号信息通过value值隐性表示，比如，可以预先定义，表格17-1中value＝0-10，对应1符号DMRS type 1的信息，value＝11-34对应2符号DMRS type 1的信息。
可选的，表格中可以同时包括多种调度规则。比如表17-1中，one codeword下，value＝2对应接收端当前正交端口个数(层数)为2，端口号为0，1，即CDM优先的调度规则，value＝35对应接收端当前正交端口个数为2，端口号为0，2，及FDM优先的调度规则。具体实现中，可以将value＝2和value＝35的状态在表格中同时保留，以满足调度的灵活性；或者可以仅保留value＝35，去除value＝2，保证SU为FDM优先调 度，此时接收端可以根据端口号调度规则隐性获知当前为SU状态；或者可以保留value＝2，去除value＝35，以CDM优先原则进行调度，提升频谱效率。具体的，表格17-1中，value＝0-34为满足基本调度需求的一种方案，value＝35-38为不同的调度方法，在一种实现方法中，表格中可以不包含value＝35-38以减小开销，或者可以将value＝35-38的一个或多个与value＝0-34中的一个或多个项进行替换，实现特定的调度需求，或者表格中可以保留value＝35-38中的一个或者多个项，以实现灵活调度。相似的，表格17-2中，two codeword下，value＝24为6层时CDM优先的调度规则，value＝73为6层时连续DMRS端口号调度方案，value＝74为6层时2个CDM组内的FDM优先调度规则，具体实现中，可以保留三种方案的任意一种或者多种，满足灵活调度或者节省开销的需求。具体的，表格17-2中，value＝0-70为满足基本调度需求的一种方案，value＝71-81为不同的调度方法，在具体实施中，表格中可以不包含value＝71-81以减小开销，或者可以将value＝71-81的一个或多个与value＝0-70中的一个或多个项替换，如one codeword下保留value＝71的状态而去除value＝2的状态，以实现特定的调度需求，或者表格中可以保留value＝71-81中的一个或者多个项，以实现灵活调度。可以理解的，表格17-1和17-2中给出的调度方案仅为示例，具体实现中，可以增加其他的调度方案以提升调度灵活性和满足调度需求。
可选的，表格17-1和17-2给出的是一种通过codeword的个数节省DCI开销的方案。具体实现中，可以不通过codeword个数进行分类，比如，可以通过接收端正交端口层数(DMRS正交端口个数)分为多个列，节省DCI开销；或者将表格17-1(或表格17-2)中one codeword和two codeword的状态分为不同的表格，对应不同的bit开销；或者可以将表格17-1(或表格17-2)中one codeword和two codeword的状态一起编码，如表格17-1的value＝0-38对应接收端正交层数小于等于4层状态，大于等于39的value值对应表格17-1中two codeword中的状态(接收端正交层数大于4层)，一种实现方法见表格16-3和17-4所示，具体实现中可以对指示状态的顺序进行改变，或者某些项进行替换，或者去除，以实现不同调度需求，也可以配置某次调度使用表格中的某些状态以节省开销，具体实现方法见前述实施例。此外，表格中可以包含SU和MU状态的指示，如表17-3和17-3括号中所示，可以理解的，具体实现中可以不包含SU和MU的状态指示信息，该处仅给出一种可能的实现方法。
表17-1 DMRS端口组合类型1示例
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000037
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000038
表17-2 DMRS端口组合类型2示例
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000039
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000040
表17-3 DMRS端口组合类型1示例
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000041
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000042
表17-4 DMRS端口组合类型2示例
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000043
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000044
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000045
在LTE中，MU-MIMO时，最大支持4个正交端口，这些端口使用相同的RE资源。这样设计的好处是可以有效的避免MU-MIMO时DMRS的速率匹配(rate matching，RM)问题。简单来说速率匹配就是指终端需要知道其时频资源内哪些RE没有数据传输，从而数据解调时避开这些RE，以进行正确的数据译码。比如，在下行传输时中，终端的时频资源内有些RE可能被控制信道或者RS占用，如果基站没有将这些RE的位置信息通知终端，终端会将这些位置的RS或者控制信息当作数据进行解调，从而引入译码误差。
在单用户MIMO(single user multiple-input multiple-output，SU-MIMO)场景下，基站仅与一个终端进行通信，时频资源内仅传输该终端的信息(RS、控制信令、数据等)。此时，终端可以根据自己的信息(如自己的端口、层数等信息)直接得知自己的DMRS的RE位置，在数据译码时避开这些RE。因此在SU时候并不存在DMRS的rate matching问题。
对于多用户MIMO(multi-user multiple-input multiple-output，MU-MIMO)，基站同时与多个终端进行通信，终端之间通过使用正交的DMRS端口(port)保证正交性，端口间的正交性可以使用时分复用(time division multiplexing，TDM)、频分复用(frequency division multiplexing，FDM)、或者码分复用(code division multiplexing，CDM)保证。当使用TDM和FDM时，正交的DMRS端口占用不同的时、频资源。此时，该DMRS端口所占用的RE上就不能传输其他DMRS端口的数据。比如，port1、port2通过FDM或者TDM正交，port1占用RE1，那么基站就不会在RE1上传输port2的数据，以免port2的数据对port1的DMRS产生噪声干扰，影响信道估计精度。然而，当port1与port2通过CDM正交时，就不存在以上问题，这是因为port1与port2的DMRS虽然占用相同的RE，但是两者通过码分复用方式进行复用的，从而保证了两个端口的DMRS之间的正交性。
在MU-MIMO时，终端需要知道被共同调度的其他终端的端口信息，从而获得哪些RE位置被其他终端的所使用端口的DMRS占用，不会传输本终端的数据。如果终端不能获得这些信息，终端会将其他用户的DMRS当作自己的数据进行解调，从而导致译码错误。
在LTE中，MU-MIMO的rate matching问题通过保证调度端口的DMRS通过CDM复用的方式解决，此时，所有终端的DMRS都通过CDM复用与相同的RE上，从而避免了DMRS的rate matching问题，这种设计可以称为对终端透明的MU-MIMO。然而，如前面介绍的，LTE中为了保证这种透明的设计，使得MU-MIMO仅能支持最大4个正交端口。
在NR系统，例如5G中，为了充分发挥MU-MIMO的优势，标准中已经采纳了MU-MIMO支持12个最大正交端口的设计。考虑到现有标准中采纳的DMRS pattern仅能支持最大4个端口的CDM复用，LTE中的透明式的方案不再适用。
因而一种新的MU-MIMO的DMRS rate matching设计十分重要，DMRS的rate matching可以通过如下方式解决：
第一种：DMRS所对应的资源单元，例如：符号(symbol)位置上所有子载波不传输数据：这种方案无需信令指示，但是会造成较大的频谱资源浪费。比如图20中UE0使用端口1～端口4，UE1使用端口5～端口8，端口9～端口12位置对应的RE全部不传输数据，就会造成极大的资源浪费。
第二种，直接通知UE其他UE的端口序号：当其他UE占用较多端口时，会造成较大的信令开销，如UE0使用端口1～2，UE1使用端口5～端口8的时候，就需要向UE0通知UE1所使用的端口5～8，并且向UE1通知UE0所使用的端口1-2，这种方式，需要的信令开销特别大。
具体的，需要1/0bit map指示DMRS port组绝对位置，比如图34中每一个DMRS端口组使用1bit进行单独的指示，对于图20中含有6个端口组，需要6bits进行指示实际发送层数并使用端口分配规则约束：比如直接指示当前基站调度的层数，对于图20，存在需要分别指示1-12层的可能，需要4bits进行指示。
为了实现更有效的数据传输，本申请提出一种和最大可支持端口数或DMRS pattern或者该pattern中的CDM端口组个数或DMRS configuration type对应的速率匹配指示方案，来匹配5G DMRS传输需求。
下面对本申请提供的DMRS速率匹配指示和接收的方法进行说明。
如图21所示，为本申请提供的一种解调参考信号速率匹配指示和接收的方法。该方法可以包括：
S201：发射端生成解调参考信号DMRS指示信息；所述DMRS指示信息用于指示可用于承载DMRS的资源中未被DMRS占用的资源；
其中，所述DMRS指示信息通过指示量化的当前正交传输层数，或当前已被使用端口组状态组合，或当前非本接收端使用的正交传输层数或端口组状态，或需被静默的资源单元，以指示可用于承载DMRS的资源中未被DMRS占用的资源。
在一种实现方式中，发射端发送所述DMRS指示信息之前，还包括：
发送DMRS传输方案指示信息，用于指示所述当前DMRS传输方案；不同的DMRS传输方案对应的最大可支持正交端口数不同，或对应的DMRS图样或对应的DMRS配置类型不同。
具体的，不同的最大可支持端口数或者DMRS图样(或DMRS图样中CDM端口组个数)，或者DMRS配置类型使用不同的DMRS指示信息进行指示，例如，对于对于正交端口，最大可支持端口数为4，6，8，12的MU-MIMO场景，或者对于非正交端口，最大可支持端口数分别为8，12，16，24；这些最大可支持的端口数分别有对应的DMRS速率匹配状态信息，这些DMRS速率匹配状态至少有两种是不同的。
DMRS指示信息则是让接收端知道速率匹配状态，也即，时频资源内，哪些资源单元还没有被其他接收端的DMRS占用，而是用于数据传输，接收端在数据解调的时候就可以在这些资源单元上进行正确的数据译码。
另一种实现方式中，该DMRS指示信息针对不同的DMRS图样或DMRS图样中 包含的DMRS端口组的个数(比如可以有两张表格分别对应DMRS图样中含有2个或者3个DMRS端口组)来配置的，一般来讲，一种DMRS图样就对应着一种支持最大可支持端口数的MU-MIMO场景，该DMRS图样示意出其支持多少个正交的CDM端口组，每一个端口组由多少个资源单元组成，因此针对不同的DMRS图样配置不同的DMRS指示信息，也可以让接收端指示，在时频资源内，哪些资源单元还没有被用于DMRS传输，而是用于数据传输，接收端便可以正确的进行数据解调。
再一种实现方式中，DMRS指示信息还可以针对DMRS配置类型(congfigration type)来进行配置。
在具体的实现中，因此，本申请实施例中为描述方便，上述的DMRS指示信息可以用value值来表示，在具体实现的时候，可以为N bits，其中N与DMRS图样中包含的DMRS端口组个数M(CS/OCC/CS+OCC)，相关。对于不同pattern或DMRS配置类型(type)，X的取值数可以不同。比如，对于包含2个DMRS端口组(M＝2)的DMRS configuration type1，N可以是1bit或者2bits，对于包含3个DMRS端口组(M＝3)的DMRS configuration type2，N可以是2或3bits。
如下表18所示，这是一个DMRS指示信息的例子，本实施例的DMRS指示信息主要是用作速率匹配的，因此用Rate matching指示信息表示，具体形式并不局限于以下形式，可以是表格，或者数字，或者公式，其中有P中状态，P的个数可以用满Nbits(用满所有信令状态)，或者大于N bits(增加系统调度灵活性或其他设计需求)，或者小于N bits(量化以节省信令开销)。M_p为速率匹配状态信息(Rate matching information，RMI)或包含DMRS速率匹配信息的参数集合(parameter set)，终端可以根据M_p的指示完成关于DMRS的速率匹配。上述速率匹配状态信息在后续和图示中用RMI来表示，仅为描述方便，对其含义不作限定。在具体实现中，该速率匹配状态信息可以用正交传输层数的量化值来表示或端口号或CDM组等前述方法表示。
表18
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000046
Rate matching指示信息与速率匹配状态信息相关，当速率匹配状态信息可以用具体的正交传输层数来表示时，上述的DMRS指示信息是从DMRS配置信息中确定的，所述DMRS配置信息中还包括总正交端口数的指示信息，该总正交端口数的指示信息可以指示实际可能出现的所有正交端口数，或者实际可能出现的所有正交端口数的量化值。所述所有正交端口数的量化值是DMRS正交层数信息，或者是DMRS天线正交端口集合指示信息，或者DMRS天线正交端口的CDM组信息，或者是依据CDM大小生成的信息。
在具体的实现中，正交传输层数的量化值可以是DMRS层数信息，或者是DMRS天线端口集合信息，或者DMRS天线端口的CDM组信息。所述DMRS层数信息中， DMRS层数是一个CDM组中的DMRS天线端口数量的整数倍。比如，对于一个含有两个DMRS天线端口组的DMRS图样，假设端口组1为{1，2，3，4}，端口组2为{5，6，7，8}，可以量化为4层与8层。此外，所述DMRS层数信息中，DMRS层数还可以是一个CDM组中的从小到大排序时连续的DMRS天线端口数量的整数倍，比如，对于CDM组{1，2，5，7}和{3，4，6，8}，可以量化为2层与4层。这些信息，都可以让接收端识别出哪些资源单元是被用于本接收端的DMRS传输，哪些资源单元是用于CDM复用的其他接收端的DMRS传输，剩下的资源单元便是用于与本接收端相关的数据传输，因此，本接收端在相应的资源单元上进行数据解调。
应理解的是，速率匹配状态信息的内容可能根据DMRS pattern的端口映射顺序不同而不同，比如，可以包括但不限定于：
1、DMRS端口组mute状态或者被使用的状态：速率匹配状态信息指示各DMRS端口组的状态，RM内容与端口映射顺序无关，CDM组编号顺序并没有具体限制，比如可以是按照端口组内端口最小序号从小到大进行排序。
2、分档量化的系统当前正交传输层数
假设DMRS端口号为p＝y+v，y是端口号偏移量，可以保证p为NR定义的DMRS端口最小值，v＝1，2，....是PDSCH当前正交传输层数(LTE中是8ports)。对v进行分档量化，以节省rate matching的DCI信令开销，在具体实现中，可以向上量化，向下量化，
2.1、向上分档量化的系统当前总层数(速率匹配状态信息内容与映射顺序相关)可以等于每个CDM组内连续的端口号个数或最大port序号(假设y＝0，仅当每个CDM组内的port编号都是连续的从小到大、或者从大到小)，例如{1，2，3，4}{5，6，7，8}{9，10，11，12}，对于相同的DMRS pattern，映射顺序改变时会RMI内容发生变化。
2.2、向下分档量化的系统当前总正交传输层数，这种方式中速率匹配状态信息的内容与DMRS pattern的映射顺序无关，可以等于CDM组连续的最小端口号，或其从1开始编号的量化(假设y＝0，端口从1开始编号)。
2.3 DMRS组内端口号从小到大排序时，从小开始，连续的DMRS编号个数，比如两个DMRS端口组{1，2，5，6}和{3，4，7，8}，可以量化为2和4层。
需要说明的是，之所以用正交传输层数的量化值，是因为如果要指示接收端具体的正交传输层数，例如指示正交传输层数{1，2，3，4}，需要2个bits来进行指示，而将正交传输层数{1，2，3，4}量化成一个值，例如向上量化成正交传输层数4，或者向下量化成正交传输层数1，或者用2或3来表示改组正交传输层数{1，2，3，4，}则指示正交传输层数的量化值只需要一个bit就可以指示了，例如用0表示正交传输层数的量化值4，因此可以减少指示开销。
2.4 DMRS组状态信息或DMRS组序号或组编号；或DMRS组个数，其中，所述CDM组个数为系统中被占用/调度(co-scheldued)的CDM组。
S202：发射端通过时频资源发送DMRS指示信息。
具体实现中，本申请实施例将不同最大可支持端口数或不同DMRS图样对应的速率匹配方式通过DMRS指示信息进行指示，一种方式是隐性指示，另一种方式是通过显性信令的方式进行指示。
隐性指示方案中，上述正交传输层数的量化值配置在DMRS配置信息表中，而DMRS指示信息采用DMRS配置信息表中的DMRS指示信息(value)来进行指示；该DMRS配置信息表可以与LTE中的类似，例如，LTE中的天线端口数(Antenna ports)，扰码指示(scrambling identity)和正交传输层数指示(number of layers indication)，它还可以包含DMRS端口数、端口索引、序列生成信息、CDM类型中的至少一种，在此基础上，添加正交传输层数的量化值。该DMRS配置信息表可以同时保存在发射端和接收端上，发射端向接收端发送指示信息，应理解的是，发射端向接收端发送LTE中原有的DCI信令(由于沿用LTE的信令，该DCI信令可能不会命名为指示信息，但是其可以指示速率匹配方案)，接收端通过该信令同时获得自己的端口信息与系统的量化总传输层数，结合该两个信息，计算出其他接收端使用的端口。也即，接收端识别出哪些资源单元是被用于本接收端的DMRS传输，哪些资源单元是用于CDM复用的其他接收端的DMRS传输，剩下的资源单元便是用于与本接收端相关的数据传输，因此，本接收端在相应的资源单元上进行数据解调。
在显性信令指示方案中，上述的DMRS指示信息和速率匹配状态信息的对应关系通过独立于LTE中的DMRS配置信息表而存在，也即DMRS指示信息和速率匹配状态信息之间的对应关系没有隐含在DMRS配置信息表中，因此发射端和接收端除了分别保存有DMRS配置信息表之外，还分别保存DMRS指示信息和速率匹配状态信息的对应关系配置表(或者该信息表可以通过RRC进行配置)，该对应关系配置表独立于DMRS配置信息表而存在，发射端通过显性信令的方式，将速率配置指示信息发送给接收端，接收端将该DMRS指示信息作为索引，在对应关系配置表中查找对应的速率匹配状态信息，接收端将该速率匹配状态信息与所述DMRS配置信息表相结合，识别出哪些资源单元是被用于被本接收端的DMRS占用，哪些资源单元是被CDM复用的其他接收端的DMRS占用，剩下的资源单元便是用于与本接收端相关的数据传输，因此，本接收端在相应的资源单元上进行数据解调。
需要说明的是，相同值的DMRS指示信息可以对应不同的正交传输层数的量化值，因此DMRS指示信息与正交传输层数的量化值之间的对应关系还可以通过单独的信令进行指示。应理解的是，对于显性指示方案，量化的正交传输层数就是通过DMRS指示信息指示的，接收端会收到两个信令，一个是LTE中的DMRS DCI信令，一个是用来传输当前量化正交传输层数的DMRS指示信息或者包含DMRS指示信息的信令(本文中又可以称为rate matching指示信令)。
可以理解的是，无论是隐性指示还是显性指示的方案中，上述的DMRS指示信息发送到接收端的时候，可以是以独立信令的方式发送，也可以是携带在下行信令中发送，在此不作限定。
上述的发送DMRS指示信息，以及指示DMRS指示信息和正交传输层数的量化值两者之间对应关系的信令，可以无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)、媒体接入控制控制单元(media access control control element，MAC CE)或DCI向接收端发送，或者这三种信令的任意两种或者三种的组合。
在一种实现方式中，所述信令由码字(codeword)的个数确定是否发送DMRS指示信息。例如，如1个codeword则触发信令以发送DMRSDMRS指示信息，2个 codeword则不发送该信令，原因在于，在2个codeword对应的SU-MIMO(single user multiple-input multiple-output，SU-MIMO)场景下，发射端，例如基站仅与一个接收端(终端)进行通信，时频资源内仅传输该终端的信息(RS、控制信令、数据等)。此时，终端可以根据自己的信息(如自己的端口、层数等信息)直接得知自己的DMRS的RE位置，在数据译码时避开这些RE。因此在SU时候并不存在DMRS的rate matching问题。
S203：接收端接收所述DMRS指示信息。
S204：根据所述DMRS指示信息得到速率匹配信息，在未传输DMRS的资源上进行数据解调。
具体实现中，如果是隐性指示方式，接收端接收到该DMRS指示信息之后，以其value值为索引，在DMRS配置信息表中查找对应的正交传输层数的量化值(进而获知DMRS层数信息，或者DMRS天线端口集合信息，或者也DMRS天线端口的码分复用CDM组信息等等)，以及自己使用的层数、DMRS端口号等信息，进而接收端识别出哪些资源单元是被用于本接收端的DMRS传输，哪些资源单元是用于CDM复用的其他接收端的DMRS传输，剩下的资源单元便是用于与本接收端相关的数据传输，因此，本接收端在相应的资源单元上进行数据解调。如果是显性指示方式，在发射端和接收端除了分别保存有DMRS配置信息表之外，还分别保存指示信息配置表情况下(或者该DMRS配置信息表可以通过RRC进行配置)，接收端将该指示信息作为索引，在对应关系配置表中查找对应的速率匹配状态，接收端将该速率匹配状态信息与所述DMRS配置信息表相结合，识别出哪些资源单元是被用于本接收端的DMRS传输，哪些资源单元是用于其他接收端的DMRS传输(可选的，在一种实现方法中，该信息可以通过速率匹配信息直接获得)，剩下的资源单元便是用于与本接收端相关的数据传输，因此，本接收端在相应的资源单元上进行数据解调。
本申请提供的DMRS指示和接收的方法还可以应用于非相关联合传输(Non-coherent joint transmission，NC-JT)2PDCCH场景，具体的，使用非准共址QCL组的2个发射端，静默非本发射端的DMRS对应的资源单元后进行数据传输。可以理解为，发射端之间相互mute对方DMRS ports group，具体实施中，可以为TRP默认将对方TRP的QCL组内的DMRS对应RE位置进行muting。对于DMRS pattern type1，其中包含两个DMRS端口组，在NC-JT场景下，两个DMRS端口组之间可以为non-QCL的，而每个DMRS端口组内的端口为QCL的，此时，2个TRP可以分别使用一个端口组，因此，该方案可以直接解决，无需额外的信令指示。对于DMRS pattern type2，其中包含3个DMRS端口组，此时可以能存在一个TRP使用1个DMRS端口组，而另一个TRP使用两个DMRS端口组的场景，此时，包含两个DMRS端口组的TPR需要指示信息进行指示，而使用1个DMRS端口组的TPR则可以无需指示信息进行指示。
而在1PDCCH场景下，也可以通过独立指示的方式，具体流程仍可参见图21所示的步骤：
需要说明的是，在步骤S201，是由非相关联合传输的发射端生成DMRS指示信息，该DMRS指示信息根据协作的多个TRP所能够使用的QCL组内的DMRS端口生成；
在步骤S202，发射端向接收端发送DMRS指示信息，对于1PDCCH场景，该DMRS 指示信息指示协作的多个TRP所能够使用的DMRS对应的资源单元，而对于2PDCCH场景，该速率匹配信息指示本发射端使用的DMRS对应的资源单元。
接收端接收到所述DMRS指示信息之后操作与前述实施例的S203和S204相同，在此不再赘述。
若该技术方案应用于上行传输场景中，则发射端可以是终端，接收端可以是网络设备，例如基站。若该技术方案应用于下行传输场景中，则发射端可以是网络设备，例如基站，接收端可以是终端。
本申请提供的DMRS速率匹配的指示的方法，通过DMRS指示信息与最大可支持端口数或者DMRS图样或DMRS配置类型对应，可以与NR的多种场景进行匹配，例如NC-JT或动态TDD或者灵活双工场景，上述方法能应用于NR复杂多变的场景中，另外还可以满足更高层数据传输的需求，并且降低指示开销。
可以理解的，这里的DMRS端口是指系统支持的所有DMRS端口，至于实际实现时，在一次调度过程中是否使用了该所有的DMRS端口，还是使用了该所有的DMRS端口中的部分DMRS端口，本申请不进行限定。
以下将说明本申请提供的DMRS速率匹配的指示方法和DMRS速率匹配的接收方法的具体实施过程。
实施例五
本实施例五主要描述设计显性信令来指示DMRS指示信息。
如图22所示的是以TRP0支持的最大可支持正交端口数为12，其中，给终端0(UE0)分配的端口是1，2，7，8ports，给终端1(UE1)分配的端口是3，4，9，10ports。
在此场景中，UE0和UE1使用的DMRS端口有多种，如图23所示是为12个DMRS端口的一种映射规则的示意图，其中，每种阴影小方格表示一个DMRS端口组被映射至的RE，n＝0。12个DMRS端口分为3个DMRS端口组，分别为DMRS端口组1，DMRS端口组2，DMRS端口组3；
每个DMRS端口组包括4个DMRS端口。每个DMRS端口组中的各DMRS端口对应的DMRS之间通过CDM方式复用相同的时频资源。这3个DMRS端口组的映射规则如下：
第一DMRS端口组映射的时频资源在频域上包括资源单元的第12n、12n+1、12n+6、12n+7个子载波。
第二DMRS端口组映射的时频资源在频域上包括资源单元的第12n+2、12n+3、12n+8、12n+9个子载波。
第三DMRS端口组映射的时频资源在频域上包括资源单元的第12n+4、12n+5、12n+10、12n+11个子载波。
其中，n可以取大于等于0，且小于
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000047
的任一个或多个整数。下文中均以资源单元在频域上的子载波数目为M为例进行说明，其中，M是大于或等于1的整数。例如，若资源单元是1个RB pair(即时域方向上的2个RB)，则M＝12；若资源单元是频域方向的2个RB，则M＝24。每个CDM组在时域上占用连续的两个符号。
假设DMRS端口组1包含DMRS端口{1，2，7，8}，DMRS端口组2包含DMRS端口{3，4，9，10}，DMRS端口组3包含DMRS端口{5，6，11，12}。这里仅作为示例，具体的 DMRS端口映射方式不做限定。值得注意的是，当DMRS端口映射方式改变时，rate matching状态信息也会发生改变。根据本方案介绍的方法，相关领域人员可以简单得到。具体实现中，如果DMRS端口映射方式改变，rate matching状态信息发生改变，则表示rate matching状态信息的正交传输层数的量化值也可以随之变化。因此，DMRS指示信息和正交传输层数的量化值之间的对应关系可以通过一个信令来进行指示。
DMRS指示信息Value的值可以有两种表示方式，一种是十进制，一种是二进制。
当value＝0(十进制)或者00(二进制)时，其对应的正交传输层数的量化值(图中以RMI示意)为4，表示当前量化层数为4；当Value＝1或01时，其表示RMI＝8；当Value＝2或10时，对应的RMI＝12；当value＝3或11时，其表示RMI＝reserved(预留值)，具体实现时，可以为空置，或者可以放置其他状态，如对应第2和第3端口组(或第1和第3端口组)被占用的量化为4层的传输状态。此时假设基站按照端口组编号顺序调度。
此时，DMRS指示信息用二进制来指示时，用2bits即可表示。
如前表4所示的是支持最大12个正交端口数的SU/MU MIMO DMRS配置信息表，其和LTE的DMRS的DCI signaling表格类似，该表格仅适用于透明的MU-MIMO，接收端通过该表格获得自己的DMRS端口和正交传输层数等信息。此外，接收端还可以根据已经接收到的DMRS指示信息(value的具体值)指示的RMI，获知量化的当前正交传输层数，或当前已被使用端口组状态组合，或当前非本接收端使用的正交传输层数或端口组状态，或需被静默的资源单元，从而获知可用于承载DMRS的资源中未被DMRS占用的资源，从而可以获得其他配对终端的DMRS端口信息，完成速率匹配。
当UE0接收到的DMRS指示信息value的值为1(十进制)或者01(二进制)时，代表当前正交传输层数的量化值为8，从而知道DMRS端口组1和DMRS端口组2均被占用。UE0结合表4中获得的自己的端口信息，知道DMRS端口组1包含自己的DMRS端口，而DMRS端口组2未包含自己的DMRS端口，从而获知DMRS端口组2被其他终端使用，进而不会传输自己的数据。同样的，UE1通过指示，得知正交传输层数的量化值为4，结合表4中获得的自己的端口信息，进而得知DMRS端口组1和DMRS端口组2被占用，从而获知非自己使用的DMRS端口组1位置不会传输自己数据。此外，UE0和UE1通过速率匹配信息，获知DMRS端口组3位置可以传输数据。
以上只是示例，对于不同的DMRS pattern以及不同的端口映射方式，RMI的值和DCI信息表的表现形式可以不同，比如，上面例子中出的RMI为当前量化层数，也可以是DMRS端口组的序号。
图22所示的系统支持的最大可支持端口数是12，在其他的实现方式中，TRP还可以支持例如4、6、8等最大可支持端口数，其支持的最大可支持端口数可以通过显性信令如RRC、MAC CE或DCI指示，也可以和场景对应的其他配置参数绑定，如频点，载波间隔、帧结构等。
如图24所示的是以TRP0支持的最大可支持端口数为6，其中，给终端0(UE0)分配的端口是1，2ports，给终端1(UE1)分配的端口是3，4ports。
在此场景中，UE0和UE1使用的DMRS端口有多种复用方式，如图25所示是为6个DMRS端口的一种映射规则的示意图，其中，每种阴影小方格表示一个DMRS端口组被映射至的RE，n＝0。6个DMRS端口分为3个DMRS端口组，分别为DMRS端口组1，DMRS端口组2，DMRS端口组3；
DMRS端口组1映射的时频资源在频域上包括资源单元的第12n、12n+1、12n+6、12n+7个子载波中的至少一个。
DMRS端口组2映射的时频资源在频域上包括资源单元的第12n+2、12n+3、12n+8、12n+9个子载波中的至少一个。
DMRS端口组3映射的时频资源在频域上包括资源单元的第12n+4、12n+5、12n+10、12n+11个子载波中的至少一个。
其中，n可以取大于等于0，且小于
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000048
的任一个或多个整数。3个CDM组在时域上占用1个符号。
当value＝0(十进制)或者00(二进制)时，其对应的正交传输层数的量化值(图中以RMI示意)为2，表示当前量化层数为2；当Value＝1或01时，其表示RMI＝4，当Value＝2或10时，对应的RMI＝6；当value＝3或11时，其表示RMI＝reserved(预留值)。
此时，DMRS指示信息用二进制来指示时，用2bits即可表示。
同理，接收端还可以根据已经接收到的DMRS指示信息(value的具体值)指示的RMI，获知量化的当前正交传输层数，或当前已被使用端口组状态组合，或当前非本接收端使用的正交传输层数或端口组状态，或需被静默的资源单元，从而获知可用于承载DMRS的资源中未被DMRS占用的资源，从而可以获得其他配对终端的DMRS端口信息，完成速率匹配。进一步的，结合表2的支持6个正交DMRS端口的SU/MU MIMO DMRS信令表格，可以获得其他配对终端的DMRS端口信息。例如，UE0接收到的DMRS指示信息value的值为1(十进制)或者01(二进制)时，代表当前正交传输层数的量化值为4，假设DMRS端口组1包含DMRS端口{1，2}，DMRS端口组2包含DMRS端口{3，4}，DMRS端口组3包含DMRS端口{5，6}，根据速率匹配信息，可以得知DMRS端口组1和DMRS端口组2被使用，DMRS端口组3未被使用。此时，终端结合自己的DMRS端口信息，可获知其他终端使用的端口组位置。
如图26所示的是以TRP0支持的最大可支持端口数为8，其中，给终端0(UE0)分配的端口是1，2，3，4ports，终端1(UE1)分配的端口是5，6，7，8ports。
在此场景中，UE0和UE1使用的DMRS端口可以有多种复用方式，如图27所示是8个DMRS端口的一种映射规则的示意图，其中，每种阴影小方格表示一个DMRS端口组被映射至的RE，n＝0。8个DMRS端口分为2个DMRS端口组，分别为DMRS端口组1，DMRS端口组2；每个DMRS端口组包括4个DMRS端口。
每个DMRS端口组中的各DMRS端口对应的DMRS之间通过CDM方式复用相同的时频资源。这2个DMRS端口组的映射规则如下：
每个DMRS端口组映射的时频资源在时域上映射于连续的2个符号，并且：
DMRS端口组1映射的时频资源在频域上均包括资源单元的第12n、12n+2、12n+4、12n+6、12n+8、12n+10个子载波中的至少一个。
DMRS端口组2映射的时频资源在频域上均包括资源单元的第12n+1、12n+3、12n+5、12n+7、12n+9、12n+11个子载波中的至少一个。
其中，n可以取大于等于0，且小于
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000049
的任一个或多个整数。
当value＝0(十进制)或者00(二进制)时，其对应的正交传输层数的量化值(图中以RMI示意)为4，表示当前量化层数为4；当Value＝1或01时，其表示RMI＝8。此外，可以表示两个CDM组的组合，比如，value＝0(十进制)或者00(二进制)时，代表DMRS端口组1被使用，当Value＝1或01时，DMRS端口组1和DMRS端口组2均被使用。
此时，DMRS指示信息用二进制来指示时，用1bits即可表示。
同理，接收端还可以根据已经接收到的DMRS指示信息(value的具体值)指示的RMI，获知量化的当前正交传输层数，或当前已被使用端口组状态组合，或当前非本接收端使用的正交传输层数或端口组状态，或需被静默的资源单元，从而获知可用于承载DMRS的资源中未被DMRS占用的资源，从而可以获得其他配对终端的DMRS端口信息，从而进行rate matching。下面以端口组状态组合作为示例，量化参数层数方案可以参照前面的例子。例如，UE0接收到的DMRS指示信息value的值为1(十进制)或者01(二进制)时，代表DMRS端口组1和DMRS端口组2均被占用，UE0根据自己可以获得DMRS端口信息，得知自己使用的DMRS端口组，从而知道其他端口组被其他UE使用，不会传输自己的数据，进而进行速率匹配。
如图28所示的是以TRP0支持的最大可支持端口数为4，其中，给终端0(UE0)分配的端口是1，2ports，终端1(UE1)分配的端口是3，4ports。在此场景中，UE0和UE1使用的DMRS端口可以有多种CDM复用方式，如图29所示是为2个DMRS端口的一种映射规则的示意图，其中，每种阴影小方格表示一个DMRS端口组被映射至的RE，4个DMRS端口分为2个DMRS端口组，分别为DMRS端口组1，DMRS端口组2；每个DMRS端口组包括2个DMRS端口。
每个DMRS端口组中的各DMRS端口对应的DMRS之间通过CDM方式复用相同的时频资源。这2个DMRS端口组的映射规则如下：
每个DMRS端口组映射的时频资源在时域上映射于1个符号，并且：
DMRS端口组1映射的时频资源在频域上包括资源单元的第2n个子载波。
DMRS端口组2映射的时频资源在频域上包括资源单元的第2n+1个子载波。
其中，n可以取大于等于0，且小于
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000050
的任一个或多个整数。
假设DMRS端口组1包含DMRS端口{1，3}，DMRS端口组2包含DMRS端口{2，4}，此时，当value＝0(十进制)或者00(二进制)时，其对应的正交传输层数的量化值(图中以RMI示意)为2，表示当前量化层数为2；当Value＝1或01时，其表示RMI＝4。
此时，DMRS指示信息用二进制来指示时，用1bits即可表示。
同理，接收端还可以根据已经接收到的DMRS指示信息(value的具体值)指示的RMI，获知量化的当前正交传输层数，或当前已被使用端口组状态组合，或当前非本接收端使用的正交传输层数或端口组状态，或需被静默的资源单元，可以获得其他配对终端的DMRS端口信息，从而进行rate matching。例如，UE0接收到的指示信息value的值为1(十进制)或者01(二进制)时，代表当前正交传输层数的量化值为4， 此时，终端通过速率匹配信息得知DMRS端口组1和DMRS端口组2均被占用，结合自己使用的DMRS端口，可以得知其他终端使用的DMRS端口组，从而进行速率匹配。需要注意的是，当图27和图29的方案也可以根据基站的调度顺序，如先FDM后CDM调度，量化为1和2层，从而，该实施例中的速率匹配信息可以与DMRS图样配置(type)或者DMRS图样包含的端口组个数进行对应，从而简化接收端存储的开销。
上述TRP支持4、6、8、12等最大可支持端口数时，最大可支持正交传输层数对于不同的DMRS pattern和DMRS端口映射方式会不同，总结成规律如下：
量化的正交传输层数可以通过以下方式获得，这里仅给出一个规则，具体实现可以直接存成数值，不需要选取的过程：
假设所有DMRS端口量化为从1开始，那么每个DMRS端口组内，当端口号从小到大排序时，量化层数可以为，
如端口组1{1，2，3，4}端口组2{5，6，7，8}，量化为4，8；
如端口组1{1，3，5，7}端口组2{2，4，6，8}，量化为1，2；
如端口组1{1，2，5，7}端口组2{3，4，6，8}，量化为2，4；
如端口组1{1，2，5，6}端口组2{3，4，7，8}，量化为2，4。
如端口组1{1，2，3，4}端口组2{5，6，7，8}端口组3{9，10，11，12}，量化为4，8，12；
如端口组1{1，4，7，10}端口组2{2，5，8，11}端口组3{3，6，9，12}，量化为1，2，3；
如端口组1{1，2，7，8}端口组2{3，4，9，10}端口组3{5，6，11，12}，量化为2，4，6；
如端口组1{1，2，7，10}端口组2{3，4，8，11}端口组3{5，6，9，12}，量化为2，4，6；
实施上述实施例，针对每一最大可支持可支持传输层设计对应的DMRS配置信息表，可以满足NR系统中不同场景的需求。
实施例六
针对不同的DMRS pattern，设计不同的信令进行指示。其中对于不同的DMRS端口映射方式，表格中的内容可能不同，可以为量化的当前正交传输层数，也可以为DMRS端口组的状态。
如图30(a)～30(e)所示，其示意的映射顺序为先CDM映射后FDM映射的DMRS pattern。
对于每一个DMRS pattern，对应的指示信息的开销不同，例如：
对于图30(a)所示的支持4个正交端口的pattern而言，需要1bit指示RMI，当RM指示取值Value＝0或00时，表示速率匹配状态信息RMI为2，即当前正交传输层数的量化值为2；当Value＝1或01时，表示速率匹配状态信息RMI＝4；
对于图30(b)所示的支持8个正交端口的pattern而言，需要1bit指示RM，当RM指示取值Value＝0/00时，表示速率匹配RMI为4；当Value＝1/01时，表示速率匹配RMI＝8；
对于图30(c)所示的支持6个正交端口的pattern而言，需要2bits指示RM，当RM指示取值Value＝0/00时，表示速率匹配RMI为2；当Value＝1/01时，表示速率匹配RMI＝4；当Value＝2/10时，表示速率匹配RMI＝6；
对于图30(d)所示的支持12个正交端口的pattern而言，需要2bits指示RM， 当RM指示取值Value＝0/00时，表示速率匹配RMI为4；当Value＝1/01时，表示速率匹配RMI＝8；当Value＝2/10时，表示速率匹配RMI＝12；
对于图30(e)所示的支持12个正交端口的pattern而言，需要2bits指示RM，当RM指示取值Value＝0/00时，表示速率匹配RMI为2；当Value＝1/01时，表示速率匹配RMI＝4；当Value＝2/10时，表示速率匹配RMI＝6。
如图31(a)～31d)所示，其示意的映射顺序为先FDM映射后CDM映射的DMRS pattern。
对于每一个DMRS pattern，对应的指示信息的开销不同，例如：
对于图31(a)所示的支持4个正交端口的pattern而言，需要1bit指示RMI，当RM指示取值Value＝0/00时，表示速率匹配RMI为1；当Value＝1/01时，表示速率匹配RMI＝2；
对于图31(b)所示的支持8个正交端口的pattern而言，需要1bit指示RM，当RM指示取值Value＝0/00时，表示速率匹配RMI为1；当Value＝1/01时，表示速率匹配RMI＝2；
对于图31(c)所示的支持6个正交端口的pattern而言，需要2bits指示RM，当RM指示取值Value＝0/00时，表示速率匹配RMI为1；当Value＝1/01时，表示速率匹配RMI＝2；当Value＝2/10时，表示速率匹配RMI＝3；当RM指示取值Value＝3/11时，表示速率匹配RMI为reserved；
对于图31(d)所示的支持12个正交端口的pattern而言，需要2bits指示RM，当RM指示取值Value＝0/00时，表示速率匹配RMI为1；当Value＝1/10时，表示速率匹配RMI＝2；当Value＝2/10时，表示速率匹配RMI＝3；当RM指示取值Value＝3/11时，表示速率匹配RMI为reserved；
此外，在该种端口映射方案下，多个DMRS图样可以对应于相同的RM表格，比如31(a)与31(b)可以对应相同的速率匹配表格，如31(a)的表格，而31(c)与31(d)可以对应相同的速率匹配表格，如31(c)的表格，及表格可以与DMRS type对应，或DMRS图样中的端口组个数对应。该方法的好处是可以节省终端存储的开销。
如图32(a)～32(d)所示，其示意的映射顺序为CDM与FDM混合端口映射方式。
对于每一个DMRS pattern，对应的指示信息的开销不同，例如：
对于图32(a)所示的支持4个正交端口的pattern而言，需要1bit指示RMI，当RM指示取值Value＝0/00时，表示速率匹配RMI为2；当Value＝1/01时，表示速率匹配RMI＝4；
对于图32(b)所示的支持8个正交端口的pattern而言，需要1bit指示RM，当RM指示取值Value＝0/00时，表示速率匹配RMI为2；当Value＝1/01时，表示速率匹配RMI＝4；
对于图32(c)所示的支持6个正交端口的pattern而言，需要2bits指示RM，当RM指示取值Value＝0/00时，表示速率匹配RMI为2；当Value＝1/01时，表示速率匹配RMI＝4；当Value＝2/10时，表示速率匹配RMI＝6；当value＝3/11时，表示速率匹配RMI的值为reserved；
对于图32(d)所示的支持12个正交端口的pattern而言，需要2bits指示RM，当RM指示取值Value＝0/00时，表示速率匹配RMI为2；当Value＝1/01时，表示速率匹配RMI＝4；当Value＝2/10时，表示速率匹配RMI＝6；当RM指示取值Value＝3/11时，表示速率匹配RMI为reserved；
此外，在该种端口映射方案下，多个DMRS图样可以对应于相同的RM表格，比如32(a)与32(b)可以对应相同的速率匹配表格，如32(a)的表格，而32(c)与32(d)可以对应相同的速率匹配表格，如32(c)的表格，及表格可以与DMRS type对应，或DMRS图样中的端口组个数对应。该方法的好处是可以节省终端存储的开销。
如图33(a)～33(d)所示，其示意的是DMRS pattern的端口组使用状态。
对于每一个DMRS pattern，对应的DMRS指示信息的开销不同，例如：
对于图33(a)所示的支持4个正交端口的pattern而言，需要1bit指示RMI，当RM指示取值Value＝0/00时，表示速率匹配RMI为1，即DMRS端口组1被占用；当Value＝1/01时，表示速率匹配RMI＝2，此时代表DMRS端口组1和2均被占用；
对于图33(b)所示的支持8个正交端口的pattern而言，需要1bit指示RM，当RM指示取值Value＝0/00时，表示速率匹配RMI为1，此时DMRS端口组1被占用；当Value＝1/10时，表示速率匹配RMI＝2，此时表示DMRS端口组1和2均被占用；
可选的，33(a)与33(b)可以对应相同的速率匹配表格，如33(a)的速率匹配表格，此时表格可以与DMRS type对应，或DMRS图样中的端口组个数对应。该方法的好处是可以节省终端存储的开销。
对于图33(c)所示的支持6个正交端口的pattern而言，需要2bits指示RM，当RM指示取值Value＝0/00时，表示速率匹配RMI为1，此时表示DMRS端口组1被占用；当Value＝1/01时，表示速率匹配RMI＝2，表示DMRS端口组1和2被占用；当Value＝2/10时，表示速率匹配RMI＝3，此时表示DMRS端口组1、2、3均被占用；当value＝3/11时，表示速率匹配RMI＝4，此时表示DMRS端口组2和3被占用；需要注意的是，对于RMI＝4，具体实现时也可以预先定义为DMRS端口组1和3被占用的状态，或者可以为reserved。
对于图33(d)所示的支持12个正交端口的pattern而言，需要2bits指示RM，当RM指示取值Value＝0/00时，表示速率匹配RMI为1，此时表示DMRS端口组1被占用；当Value＝1/01时，表示速率匹配RMI＝2，表示DMRS端口组1和2被占用；当Value＝2/10时，表示速率匹配RMI＝3，此时表示DMRS端口组1、2、3均被占用；当value＝3/11时，表示速率匹配RMI＝4，此时表示DMRS端口组2和3被占用；需要注意的是，对于RMI＝4，具体实现时也可以预先定义为DMRS端口组1和3被占用的状态，或者可以为reserved。。
可选的，33(c)与33(d)可以对应相同的速率匹配表格，此时表格可以与DMRS type对应，或DMRS图样中的端口组个数对应。该方法的好处是可以节省终端存储的开销。
值得注意的是，该方案中的CDM组合仅为例子，在具体实施过程中，可以减少或增加，或者替换为其他的DMRS状态组合。
需要注意的，在实际的实施过程中，value可以直接对应端口组被占用的状态组合， 无需RMI的表示，比如对于图33(a)，可以描述为表19-1。
表19-1
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000051
此外，可选的，可以在表格中加入SU的状态，比如表19-2。
表19-2
value description
0/00 SU或0层被占用
... ....
这里的0层主要用来通知终端当前为SU状态，并不限定具体的表达形式。
实施上述图30～33所示的实施例，针对每一种pattern，或一类DMRS配置(type)或具有相同端口组个数的DMRS pattern，设计对应的DMRS指示信息，可以满足NR系统中不同场景的需求，如用于极高可靠性极低时延通信(Ultra-Reliable and Low-Latency Communication，URLLC)场景的pattern而不只是用于增强移动宽带(Enhanced Mobile Broadband，eMBB)的pattern，针对其他不同的pattern重新考虑表格的设计。
实施例七
DMRS配置信息和DMRS指示信息可以通过为RRC、MAC-CE、DCI的组合，进行分级指示，比如参数设置(parameter set)可以通过RRC进行配置，其中包含量化的正交传输层数信息或CDM组状态信息，用以作DMRS的速率匹配，通过DCI信令选择parameter set通知终端。以上的多种量化的正交传输层数方法均可放置于parameter set内，其中parameter set可以包括其他的信息，比如ZP-CSI-RS或者PDSCH的起始位置、结束位置等等。这里给出的表格仅为示例，具体的表格形式、大小、及描述形式不做限定。具体实现时，parameter set可以通过RRC进行配置，其中parameter set可以包含DMRS相关的速率匹配信息如表20所示。
表20
value description
0/00 Parameter set 1
1/01 Parameter set 2
2/10 Parameter set 3
3/11 Parameter set 4
... ...
实施例八
本实施例中，将总正交传输层数或总正交端口数(本文中总正交传输层数和总正交端口数两者在数值上相等)相关信息设计到DMRS配置信息表中，该总正交端口数 相关信息通过一个指示信息来体现，该指示信息可以指示实际可能出现的所有正交端口数，或者实际可能出现的所有正交端口数的量化值，所有正交端口数的量化值可以是DMRS正交层数信息，或者是DMRS天线正交端口集合指示信息，或者DMRS天线正交端口的CDM组信息，或者是依据CDM大小生成的信息。
针对如图34中的34(a)，34(b)，34(c)和34(d)四种pattern，相对于前述表1到表4中的DMRS配置信息表，本实施例中添加了总正交传输层数的指示信息这一特征，如图表21到表24所示的信息表中的total或total layer number一栏所示的即为总正交传输层数的指示信息。
表21
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000052
表22
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000053
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000054
表23
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000055
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000056
表24
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000057
本实施例考虑了所有可能出现的总正交传输层数，可以适配所有的场景，并且可以用于做MU适配的多个终端进行速率匹配。
本实施例在前述实施例提供的DMRS配置信息表的内容的基础上，添加了总正交传输层数这一特征，即为量化的层数信息，终端结合该信息，可以隐性获得RMI信息。
本实施例考虑了所有可能出现的总正交传输层数，可以适配所有的场景。其中的quantized layer num是对可能的正交传输层数的量化值，并且采用DMRS配置信息表中的DMRS指示信息(value)相同的值来进行指示；该DMRS配置信息表可以与LTE中的类似，例如，LTE中的天线端口数(Antenna ports)，扰码指示(scrambling identity)和正交传输层数指示(number of layers indication)，它还可以包含DMRS端口数、端口索引、序列生成信息、CDM类型中的至少一种，在此基础上，添加正交传输层数的量化值。该DMRS配置信息表可以同时保存在发射端和接收端上，发射端需要向接收端指示速率匹配方案的时候，只需要发送一个指示信息到接收端即可，接收端接收到该指示信息之后，以其作为索引，在DMRS配置信息表中查找对应的正交传输层数的量化值，同时获知DMRS层数信息，或者DMRS天线端口集合信息，或者也DMRS天线端口的码分复用CDM组信息等等，进而接收端识别出哪些资源单元是被用于本接收端的DMRS传输，哪些资源单元是用于CDM复用的其他接收端的DMRS传输，剩下的资源单元便是用于与本接收端相关的数据传输，因此，本接收端在相应的资源单元上进行数据解调。
另一种实现方式中，本申请实施例的指示信息指示非接收端自身使用的DMRS端口组状态。具体的，可以通过DCI来指示：
针对34(a)和34(b)所示的configration，通过如下表25进行指示：
表25
value MU Description
0   non-mute
1 MU all-mute
该表25可以根据协议配置在发射端和接收端，也可以由发射端通过RRC信令发送至接收端。
其中，与前述实施例不同的是，该表25中，value值对应的不再是正交传输层数的量化值，而是表示非接收端自身使用的DMRS端口组的状态，例如value＝0的时候，表示不管是SU还是MU配对，非接收端自身使用的DMRS端口组的状态是非静默(non-mute)，而value＝1时，表示非接收端自身使用的DMRS端口组的状态是全部静默(all-mute)。接收端接收到该指示信息(value值)之后，即可判断出非自身使用的DMRS端口组的状态，从而完成速率匹配。需要说明的是，表25中MU一栏仅为示例，具体实现的时候可以没有。
针对34(c)和34(d)所示的configration，一种方式也是指示非自身使用的DMRS端口组是否被静默，如下表26所示，其中较大和较小的集合可以根据非接收端自身使用的端口组的相对关系进行确定，例如，对于3个端口组的场景，当终端使用1个端口组时，较大和较小的端口组可以根据剩余的2个端口组内的最大(或最小)端口号的相对关系(如大小)确定，具体实施中，可以不包含比较的过程，直接将较大和较小的端口组预存。
表26
value SU/MU Description
0 SU non-mute
1 MU mute smaller set
2 MU mute larger set
3 MU all-mute
另一种方式是，指示非自身使用的DMRS端口组具体是哪些，例如，当接收端使用端口组1时，value＝0时，表示未被静默；value＝1时，表示做MU配对的其他接收端使用的是端口组2；value＝2时，表示做MU配对的其他接收端使用的是端口组3；value＝3时，表示做MU配对的其他接收端使用的是端口组2和端口组3。具体实现中，可以不定义端口组的序号，通过端口组中的端口号来指示端口组，例如端口组2包含端口{5，6，7，8}，则可以在表格中直接将端口组2替换为{5，6，7，8}，具体如表27所示。
表27
value SU/MU Description
0 SU non-mute
1 MU 端口组2
2 MU 端口组3
3 MU 所有端口组or端口组2，端口组3
再一种方式是，通过RRC+DCI多级指示，方式如下：
DMRS的rate matching信息可以通过RRC+DCI多级指示，或者RRC+MAC CE+DCI多级指示
RRC可以配置多个包含DMRS rate matching参数集合，通过DCI信令动态选择
比如，RRC配置2个parameter set，1bit DCI信令动态进行选择，或者，RRC配置4个parameter set，2bits DCI信令进行动态选择，具体如表28-1和表28-2所示。
表28-1
1 bit case
value of' RE mapping' field Description
0/'00' parameter set 1 configured by higher layers
1/'01' parameter set 2 configured by higher layers
表28-2
2 bits case
value of' RE mapping' field Description
0/'00' parameter set 1 configured by higher layers
1/'01' parameter set 2 configured by higher layers
3/'10' parameter set 3 configured by higher layers
4/'11' parameter set 4 configured by higher layers
parameter set 中包含DMRS的rate matching信息，rate matching状态信息可以有多种表达形式，比如：
可以是上述方案中给出的4种状态，具体的为value值对应的0，1，2，3四种状态；
可以是每个CDM组是否被占用的状态信息，例如可以对CDM组进行编号，比如1、2、3DMRS CDM组；具体实现中，可以不存在对于CDM组编号的状态，可以通过指示CDM组中的端口号实现。
可以是ZP DMRS的具体位置，对应多个CDM组的位置(例如使用bitmap，对于config1 2bits，对于config2 3bits)；
可以是rate matching pattern，直接表示DMRS symbol上的哪些RE需要被mute，此时没有CDM组概念。
另一种实现方式中，在DMRS配置信息表中用CDM组信息用来实现DMRS的速率匹配。
一种实现方式中RMI可以表示为CDM组的状态信息，比如8-1和8-2的“State of CDM group”一栏。下面针对具体的DMRS pattern作为示例，其中具体的DMRS port端口号仅为示例。对于不同的端口映射顺序(port mapping)，下面实施例中的DMRS端口号(port index)可能发生改变，这里不做限定。
结合图34(图34中端口组即CDM端口组)，对于表8-1对应的FL DMRS configuration type 1，状态1(State of CDM group＝1)代表CDM端口组1(图34(a)和(b)中的斜划线部分)被占用；状态2代表CDM组1和2被占用(图34(a)和(b)中的斜划线和横线部分)；
对于表格8-2对应的DMRS type 2，状态1对应CDM组1被占用(图34(c)和(d)中的斜划线部分)，状态2代表CDM组1和2被占用(图34(c)和(d)中的 斜划线和横线部分)，状态3代表CDM组1、2、3被占用(图34(c)和(d)中的斜划线和横线部分、竖线部分)。
上面仅给出了一种CDM组占用状态的示例，具体实施中每种状态可以替换成其他的CDM组被占用的状态。此外，具体实现时，表8-1和表8-2中具体指示的CDM组状态(如表中的State of CDM group＝1、2、3)可以替换成被占用的CDM组编号(如CDM group 1)，或者可以直接表示为CDM组内的全部端口号(如CDM group 1可以表示为端口号0、1或者0、1、4、6)或者占用的CDM组中的至少一个DMRS端口号(如CDM group 1可以表示为端口号0或者0、1)。此外，在表示为CDM组内的全部端口号方式中，表格8-1和表8-2中可以省略symbol number一栏，通过直接指示CDM组内全部的端口号隐性指示1符号或者2符号FL DMRS pattern，比如，对于1符号type1，CDM组1表示为0，1，对于2符号type1，CDM组1表示为0，1，4，6，接收端可以根据CDM组内的端口号隐性获得1符号或者2符号DMRS的信息。
另一种实现方式中，表格的RMI信息可以表示被占用的CDM组个数，即表8-1和8-2中的“State of CDM group”可以替换为‘number of CDM groups’或‘number of co-scheduled CDM groups’，具体文字表达不做限定。
表29-1给出了DMRS type 1对应的一种添加方法，‘number of co-scheduled CDM groups’表示type 1中1个或者2个CDM组被占用。一种实现方法中，CDM组个数可以依据一定调度顺序实现，如依据前述实施例中当前量化的正交端口层数获得。一种实现方法中，CDM组个数信息可以直接对应特定的CDM组序号，或基于一定调度规则。比如对于DMRS type 1，1个CDM组用可以对应CDM组1被占用，2个CDM组用可以理解为CDM组1和CDM组2被占用。对于DMRS type2，1个CDM组用可以对应CDM组1被占用，2个CDM组用可以理解为CDM组1和CDM组2被占用，3个CDM组可以理解为CDM组1、2、3被占用。另一种实现方法中，CDM组个数可以不与CDM组序号绑定，比如对于DMRS type 1，1个CDM组用表示系统中仅有一个CDM组使用，该CDM组可以为CDM组1或者CDM组2，接收端可以根据其具体DMRS端口号获得被占用的CDM组序号，2个CDM组则表示2个CDM组均被占用，接收端可能使用1个或者两个CDM组，若接收端使用CDM组2，那么可以推断CDM组1被其他接收端占用，从而进行速率匹配。
表29-1 DMRS端口组合类型1示例
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000059
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000060
此外，另一种实现方式中，表格中添加的CDM组个数，可以不包括接收端自身使用的CDM组个数，即表格中指示系统当前使用的且不包括接收端自身使用的CDM组的个数，或者可以理解为(系统中被占用的CDM组总个数-接收端使用的CDM组个数)。比如，对于Type1，当系统共2个CDM组被调用，接收端使用2个CDM组时，非接收端自身使用的CDM组个数为0；当系统共2个CDM组被调用，接收端使用1个CDM组，非接收端自身使用的CDM组个数为1个；当系统共1个CDM组被调用，接收端使用1个CDM组，非接收端使用的CDM组个数为0。该种方案中的CDM组个数可以替换为表D-1中的number of co-scheduled CDM groups。具体表格本领域研究人员可以根据上述原则直接推导得出表格。
此外，上述DMRS配置信息表格中还可以添加功率增加(power boosting)信息，如29-1中添加一列给出具体每个状态的power boosting数值，具体数值对于type 1可以是0db、3dB，对于type 2可以是0dB、1.77dB、4.77dB。在表格中，power boosting的具体数值可以直接根据当前状态占用的CDM组的个数和接收端port信息直接推断可得，power boosting value与状态具有一一对应关系。
具体原则为，对于DMRS type 1，当接收端使用占用1个CDM端口组，且系统当前仅有1个CDM端口组被占用时，power boosting数值为0dB；当接收端使用占用2个CDM端口组，且系统当前有2个CDM端口组被占用时，power boosting数值为0dB；当接收端使用占用1个CDM端口组，且系统当前有2个CDM端口组被占用时，power  boosting数值为3dB。表29-2中给出一个对应DMRS type 1的一个例子，具体port调用、symbol number不做限定。
表29-2 DMRS端口组合类型1示例
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000061
对于DMRS type 2，当接收端使用占用1个CDM端口组，且系统当前仅有1个CDM端口组被占用时，power boosting数值为0dB；当接收端使用占用2个CDM端口组，且系统当前有2个CDM端口组被占用时，power boosting数值为0dB；当接收端使用占用1个CDM端口组，且系统当前有2个CDM端口组被占用时，power boosting数值为1.77dB；当接收端使用占用1个CDM端口组，且系统当前有3个CDM端口组被占用时，power boosting数值为4.77dB。这里限定MU时候一个接收端最多只能调用1个CDM组中的4个端口，即MU时，一个接收端最多仅能占用1个CDM组。表29-3中给出一个对应DMRS type 2的一个例子，具体port调用、symbol number不做限定。
Table 29-3 DMRS端口组合类型2示例
Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-000062
实施例九
本实施例用于解决非相关联合传输(Non-coherent joint transmission，NC-JT 2PDCCH)场景下的DMRS rate matching问题。
如图35所示，在此Multi-TRP，NC-JT，2 PDCCH场景中支持12ports，TRP0使用{1，2，7，10}；TRP1使用{3，4，5，6，8，9，11，12}
本实施例中提供一种解决方式是协议默认解决方案：TRP默认将非TRP自己可使用的一个或多个QCL组内的DMRS对应RE位置进行静默(mute)。例如，对于如图36所示的DMRS pattern，即两个DMRS端口组，则2个TRP将非自身使用的DMRS端口对应的时频资源位置静默，因此该方案可以直接解决，无需额外的信令指示。
另一种解决方式是独立指示方案如图37所示：TRP默认将非TRP自己可使用的一个或多个QCL组内的DMRS对应RE位置进行muting，此外，对于有多个端口组的TRP，其给UE发送RM信号，该速率匹配信令可以根据之前介绍的方案适用，需要注意的是，此时，速率匹配信令是根据当前TRP可使用的DMRS端口或可支持可支持最大层数或自身可使用的DMRS端口对应的DMRS图样进行生成。UE根据自己的 使用收到的速率匹配信令完成速率匹配，方案可以使用之前实施例中方案。这里仅以一种DMRS pattern举例，对于不同的DMRS pattern，可以使用相应的RM信令。
比如，对于图37，TRP0仅能使用DMRS端口组1，TRP1可以使用DMRS端口组2和3，此时，TRP0将DMRS端口组2和3对应时频资源静默，TRP1将DMRS端口组1对应时频资源静默，此外，终端会收到TRP1的速率匹配信令，该信令指示端口组2和3共的量化正交传输层数，即TRP1可使用的DMRS端口的量化正交传输层数，此时TRP0可以没有速率匹配信令，或者速率匹配信令可以发送代表SU的状态。终端接收TRP1的速率匹配信令，完成速率匹配，解调TRP1发送的数据。
需要说明的是，本实施例也可以采用指示信息指示非接收端本身使用的DMRS端口组的方式，例如对于TRP0进入NC-JT模式时，无需信令指示，或者使用原始信令指示，而对于TRP1，通过下表进行指示，当value＝0的时候，表示非自身使用的DMRS端口组未被静默，而value＝1时，非自身使用的DMRS端口组都被静默，具体如表30所示。
表30
value Description
0 non-mute
1 all-mute
实施例十
本实施例十适用于动态TDD或者灵活双工场景。
如图38所示，在Dynamic TDD中，支持12ports，TRP0使用{1，2，3，4}DMRS端口；TRP1使用{5，6，7，8}DMRS端口；
本实施例中提供一种解决方式是协议默认解决方案：TRP默认将非TRP自己可使用的一个或多个QCL组内的DMRS对应RE位置进行静默(mute)。例如，对于如图39所示的DMRS pattern，即两个DMRS端口组，TRP0和TRP1各使用一个DMRS端口组，并将非自己使用的DMRS端口组对应的时频资源位置静默，因此，该方案可以直接解决，无需额外的信令指示。
另一种解决方式是独立指示方案如图40所示：TRP默认将非TRP自己可使用的一个或多个QCL组内的DMRS对应RE位置进行muting，此外，对于有多个端口组的TRP，其给UE发送RM信号，该速率匹配信令可以根据之前介绍的方案适用，需要注意的是，此时，速率匹配信令可以根据当前TRP可使用的DMRS端口或可使用的DMRS端口对应的DMRS图样进行生成。UE根据自己的使用收到的速率匹配信令完成速率匹配，方案可以使用之前实施例中方案。这里仅与一种DMRS pattern举例，对于不同的DMRS pattern，可以使用相应的RM信令。
比如，对于图40，TRP0仅能使用DMRS端口组1，TRP1可以使用DMRS端口组2和3，此时，TRP0将DMRS端口组2和3位置静默，TRP1将DMRS端口组1位置静默，此外，终端会收到TRP1的速率匹配信令，该信令指示DMRS端口组2和3的量化正交传输层数，即TRP1的量化正交传输层数，此时TRP0可以没有速率匹配信令，或者速率匹配信令可以发送代表SU的状态。终端接收TRP1的速率匹配信令，完成速率匹配，解调TRP1发送的数据。
需要说明的是，本实施例也可以采用指示信息指示非接收端本身使用的DMRS端口组的方式，例如对于TRP0进入NC-JT模式时，无需信令指示，或者使用原始信令指示，而对于TRP1，通过下表进行指示，当value＝1的时候，非自身使用的DMRS端口组未被静默，而value＝1时，非自身使用的DMRS端口组都被静默，具体如表31所示：
表31
value Description
0 non-mute
1 all-mute
上述主要从各个网元之间交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方案进行了介绍。可以理解的是，各个网元，例如基站或者终端。为了实现上述功能，其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对基站或者终端进行功能模块的划分，例如，可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块，也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是，本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。下面以采用对应各个功能划分各个功能模块为例进行说明：
图41示出了一种发射端350的结构示意图。该发射端350可以是上文中涉及的基站100或终端200。该发射端350可以包括处理单元3501和发送单元3502。其中，处理单元3501可以用于执行图6中的S101，即从多个DMRS配置信息表中选择DMRS配置信息，并且根据该DMRS配置信息得到DMRS指示信息，或执行图21所示的S201，即生成解调参考信号DMRS指示信息；所述DMRS指示信息与最大可支持端口数或DMRS图样，或DMRS配置类型对应，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。发送单元3502可以用于执行图6中的S102或图21所述的S202中发射端执行通过时频资源发送DMRS相关信息或DMRS指示信息的动作，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述，在此不再赘述。
图42示出了一接收端360的结构示意图。该接收端360可以包括处理单元3602和接收单元3603。其中：该接收端360可以是上文中涉及的终端200或基站100。接收单元3603用于执行图6中的S103中接收端所执行的接收所述DMRS指示信息的动作或用于执行图21中的S203中接收端所执行的接收所述DMRS指示信息的动作，和/本申请实施例中所涉及到的接收端接收任何信息的动作。处理单元3602可以用于执行图6中的S104，即根据接收的所述DMRS指示信息，或用于执行图21中的S204，即根据接收的所述DMRS指示信息，从而完成解调参考信号，和/或用于支持本文所 描述的技术的其它过程。上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述，在此不再赘述。示例的，在具体实现过程中，可以理解为，接收端360先通过例如但不限于傅里叶反变换(inverse fourier transform，IFFT)获取每个RE上承载的符号(如获取每个OFDM符号每个子载波上承载的符号)，然后，根据DMRS所在的时频资源，从获取的符号中获取DMRS。
在本申请实施例中，发射端350～接收端360对应各个功能划分各个功能模块的形式来呈现，或该以采用集成的方式划分各个功能模块的形式来呈现。这里的“模块”可以指特定应用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit，ASIC)，执行一个或多个软件或固件程序的处理器和存储器，集成逻辑电路，和/或其他可以提供上述功能的器件，其中，处理器与存储器可以集成在一起，也可以相对独立。
在一个简单的实施例中，本领域的技术人员可以想到将，发射端350～接收端360中的任一个通过如图43所示的结构实现。
如图43所示，装置390可以包括：存储器3901、处理器3902、以及通信接口3903。其中存储器3902用于存储计算机执行指令，当装置390运行时，处理器3901执行存储器3902存储的计算机执行指令，以使装置390执行本申请实施例提供的信息传输方法。具体的信息传输方法可参考上文及附图中的相关描述，此处不再赘述。其中，通信接口3903可以是收发器。
可选的，装置390可以是现场可编程门阵列(field-programmable gate array，FPGA)，专用集成芯片(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)，系统芯片(system on chip，SoC)，中央处理器(central processor unit，CPU)，网络处理器(network processor，NP)，数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor，DSP)，微控制器(micro controller unit，MCU)，还可以采用可编程控制器(programmable logic device，PLD)或其他集成芯片。
本申请实施例还提供一种存储介质，该存储介质可以包括存储器3902。
根据本发明实施例的第一方面，提供一种数据发送方法，所述方法用于通过多个解调参考信号DMRS端口向一个接收端设备发送多个数据流，其中所述多个DMRS端口分属至少两个端口组，每个端口组中的各个DMRS端口之间满足准共址QCL关系，每个端口组中的任一DMRS端口与任一其他端口组中的任一DMRS端口满足非准共址Non-QCL关系；所述多个DMRS端口被分配给至少两个发射端设备，每一发射端设备分配到的DMRS端口属于同一个端口组，所述方法包括：
在一种可能的设计中，每一发射端设备将一个码字映射为该发射端设备分配到的DMRS端口对应的数据流；
每一发射端设备将该发射端设备分配到的DMRS端口对应的数据流发送给所述接收端设备。
在一种可能的设计中，所述至少两个发射端设备为同一发射端设备的至少两块天线面板，
每一发射端设备将一个码字映射为该发射端设备分配到的DMRS端口对应的数据流具体为，对于每一天线面板，所述同一发射端设备将一个码字映射为该天线面板分 配到的DMRS端口对应的数据流；
每一发射端设备将该发射端设备分配到的DMRS端口对应的数据流发送给所述接收端设备具体为，每一天线面板将该天线面板分配到的DMRS端口对应的数据流发送给所述接收端设备。
在一种可能的设计中，在所述每一发射端设备将一个码字映射为该发射端设备分配到的DMRS端口对应的数据流之前，所述方法还包括，所述至少两个发射端设备中的一个发射端设备向所述接收端设备发送一指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示为所述接收端设备分配的所述多个DMRS端口。
在一种可能的设计中，在所述每一发射端设备将一个码字映射为该发射端设备分配到的DMRS端口对应的数据流之前，所述方法还包括，所述同一发射端设备向所述接收端设备发送一指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示为所述接收端设备分配的所述多个DMRS端口。
在本发明实施例的各个方面和各种可能的设计中，所述多个数据流的数量(也就是所述多个DMRS端口的数量)小于等于4，但也可以不限于此。例如，本发明实施例提供的技术方案可以应用于数据流的数量小于等于4的场景，而不应用于数据流的数量大于4的场景。更进一步的说，在数据流的数量小于等于4的场景中，本发明实施例提供的技术方案可以应用于数据流的数量为3和/或4的场景(即所述多个数据流的数量为3和/或4)，而不应用于所述多个数据流的数量为2的场景。当然本发明实施例提供的技术方案也可以不受上述场景的限制。
根据本发明实施例的第二方面，提供一种数据接收方法，包括：
通过多个DMRS端口接收多个数据流，其中，所述多个DMRS端口分属至少两个端口组，每个端口组中的各个DMRS端口之间满足准共址QCL关系，每个端口组中的任一DMRS端口与任一其他端口组中的任一DMRS端口满足非准共址Non-QCL关系；
对于所述至少两个端口组中的每个端口组，接收端设备根据所述多个DMRS端口中处于该端口组中的DMRS端口所对应的数据流，恢复出一个码字。
在一种可能的设计中，在接收所述多个数据流之前，所述方法还包括：
接收一指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示所述多个DMRS端口。
在一种可能的设计中，所述多个数据流的数量(也就是所述多个DMRS端口的数量)小于等于4，但也可以不限于此。例如，本发明实施例提供的技术方案可以应用于数据流的数量小于等于4的场景，而不应用于数据流的数量大于4的场景。更进一步的说，在数据流的数量小于等于4的场景中，本发明实施例提供的技术方案可以应用于数据流的数量为3和/或4的场景(即所述多个数据流的数量为3和/或4)，而不应用于所述多个数据流的数量为2的场景。当然本发明实施例提供的技术方案也可以不受上述场景的限制。
根据本发明实施例的第三方面，提供一种数据接收方法，包括：
通过多个DMRS端口接收多个数据流，其中，所述多个DMRS端口属于同一端口组，且该端口组中的各个DMRS端口之间满足准共址QCL关系；
根据所述多个数据流，恢复出一个码字。
在一种可能的设计中，在接收所述多个数据流之前，所述方法还包括：
接收一指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示所述多个DMRS端口。
在一种可能的设计中，所述多个数据流的数量小于等于4。
在上述各个方面和各种可能的设计中，所述指示信息为下行控制信息DCI。
上述数据流又叫数据层。
根据本发明实施例的第四方面，提供一种发射端设备，所述发射端设备用于与至少一个其他发射端设备，通过多个解调参考信号DMRS端口向一个接收端设备发送多个数据流，其中所述多个DMRS端口分属至少两个端口组，每个端口组中的各个DMRS端口之间满足准共址QCL关系，每个端口组中的任一DMRS端口与任一其他端口组中的任一DMRS端口满足非准共址Non-QCL关系；所述多个DMRS端口被分配给所述发射端设备和所述至少一个其他发射端设备，所述发射端设备和所述至少一个其他发射端设备中的每一发射端设备分配到的DMRS端口属于同一个端口组，所述发射端设备包括：
映射模块，用于将一个码字映射为该发射端设备分配到的DMRS端口对应的数据流；
发射模块，用于将该发射端设备分配到的DMRS端口对应的数据流发送给所述接收端设备。
在一种可能的设计中，所述发射端设备和所述至少一个其他发射端设备为同一发射端设备的至少两块天线面板，
所述映射模块设置于所述同一发射端设备内，且所述映射模块具体用于，对于每一天线面板，将一个码字映射为该天线面板分配到的DMRS端口对应的数据流；
所述发射模块设置于所述同一发射端设备内，且所述发射模块具体用于，每一天线面板将该天线面板分配到的DMRS端口对应的数据流发送给所述接收端设备。
在一种可能的设计中，所述发射模块还用于，向所述接收端设备发送一指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示为所述接收端设备分配的所述多个DMRS端口。
在一种可能的设计中，所述多个数据流的数量小于等于4。
根据本发明实施例的第五方面，提供一种接收端设备，包括：
接收模块，用于通过多个DMRS端口接收多个数据流，其中，所述多个DMRS端口分属至少两个端口组，每个端口组中的各个DMRS端口之间满足准共址QCL关系，每个端口组中的任一DMRS端口与任一其他端口组中的任一DMRS端口满足非准共址Non-QCL关系；
恢复模块，用于对于所述至少两个端口组中的每个端口组，根据所述多个DMRS端口中处于该端口组中的DMRS端口所对应的数据流，恢复出一个码字。
在一种可能的设计中，所述接收模块还用于，接收一指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示所述多个DMRS端口。
在一种可能的设计中，所述多个数据流的数量小于等于4。
根据本发明实施例的第六方面，提供一种接收端设备，包括：
接收模块，用于通过多个DMRS端口接收多个数据流，其中，所述多个DMRS端口属于同一端口组，且该端口组中的各个DMRS端口之间满足准共址QCL关系；
恢复模块，用于根据所述多个数据流，恢复出一个码字。
在一种可能的设计中，所述接收模块还用于，接收一指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示所述多个DMRS端口。
在一种可能的设计中，所述多个数据流的数量小于等于4。
在本发明实施例的各个方面及各个设计中，上述指示信息可以为下行控制信息DCI。
根据本发明实施例的第七方面，提供一种数据发送方法，所述方法用于通过多个解调参考信号DMRS端口向一个接收端设备发送多个数据流，其中所述多个DMRS端口分属至少两个端口组，每个端口组中的各个DMRS端口之间满足准共址QCL关系，每个端口组中的任一DMRS端口与任一其他端口组中的任一DMRS端口满足非准共址Non-QCL关系；所述多个DMRS端口被分配给同一发射端设备，对于每一端口组，所述方法包括：
所述发射端设备将一个码字映射为所述多个DMRS端口中处于该端口组中的DMRS端口所对应的数据流；
所述发射端设备将所述数据流发送给所述接收端设备。
在一种可能的设计中，所述方法还包括，所述发射端设备向所述接收端设备发送一指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示为所述接收端设备分配的所述多个DMRS端口。
在一种可能的设计中，所述多个数据流的数量小于等于4。
根据本发明实施例的第八方面，提供一种发射端设备，所述发射端设备用于通过多个解调参考信号DMRS端口向一个接收端设备发送多个数据流，其中所述多个DMRS端口分属至少两个端口组，每个端口组中的各个DMRS端口之间满足准共址QCL关系，每个端口组中的任一DMRS端口与任一其他端口组中的任一DMRS端口满足非准共址Non-QCL关系；所述多个DMRS端口被分配给所述发射端设备，所述发射端设备包括：
映射模块，用于对于每一端口组，将一个码字映射为所述多个DMRS端口中处于该端口组中的DMRS端口所对应的数据流；
发射模块，用于将所述数据流发送给所述接收端设备。
在一种可能的设计中，所述方法还包括，所述发射模块还用于向所述接收端设备发送一指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示为所述接收端设备分配的所述多个DMRS端口。
在一种可能的设计中，所述多个数据流的数量小于等于4。
总体来说，本发明实施例提供了一种数据发送方法，所述方法用于通过多个解调参考信号DMRS端口向一个接收端设备发送多个数据流，其中所述多个DMRS端口分属至少两个端口组，每个端口组中的各个DMRS端口之间满足准共址QCL关系，每个端口组中的任一DMRS端口与任一其他端口组中的任一DMRS端口满足非准共址Non-QCL关系，对于每个端口组，所述方法包括：
将一个码字映射为所述多个DMRS端口中处于该端口组中的DMRS端口所对应的数据流；
将所述数据流发送给所述接收端设备。
在一种可能的设计中，所述方法还包括，向所述接收端设备发送一指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示为所述接收端设备分配的所述多个DMRS端口。
在一种可能的设计中，所述多个数据流的数量小于等于4。
在一种可能的设计中，上述多个DMRS端口可以分配给同一发射端设备；也可以分配给同一发射端设备的多块天线面板，其中每块天线面板分配到的DMRS端口属于同一端口组；也可以分配给为为同一接收端设备服务(例如基于CoMP(Coordinated Multi-Point，多点协作)相关技术)的多个发射端设备，每个发射端设备分配到的DMRS端口属于同一端口组。此外，上述DMRS端口也可以采用其他方式分配给一个或者多个发射端设备，例如但不限于上述几种方式的各种可行的组合方式。
相应的，本发明实施例还提供了一种数据接收方法，包括：
通过多个DMRS端口接收多个数据流，其中，所述多个DMRS端口属于同一端口组，或者分属至少两个端口组，每个端口组中的各个DMRS端口之间满足准共址QCL关系，每个端口组中的任一DMRS端口与任一其他端口组中的任一DMRS端口满足非准共址Non-QCL关系；
对于所述同一端口组或者至少两个端口组中的每个端口组，接收端设备根据所述多个DMRS端口中处于该端口组中的DMRS端口所对应的数据流，恢复出一个码字。
在一种可能的设计中，在接收所述多个数据流之前，所述方法还包括：
接收一指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示所述多个DMRS端口。
其中，所述多个数据流的数量小于等于4。
不难理解，在接收端设备一侧，接收端设备可以无需关注上述多个DMRS端口来自一个发射端设备，还是来自一个发射端设备的多块天线面板，还是来自多个发射端设备。
QCL(Quasi-Co-Location，准共址)通常用于描述相似的大尺度衰落，以及相似的空间方向(例如但不限于波束方向)等，因此非准共址(Non-Quasi-Co-Location，Non-QCL)通常用于描述不同的大尺度衰落，以及不同的空间方向等。有关QCL和Non-QCL的相关内容已经在现有技术中进行了清楚的描述，因此此处不再赘述。
在实际传输中，信息比特(bit)通常是以传输块(Transport Block，TB)的形式进行划分的，而一个传输块可以是一个码字(codeword，CW)，有关TB和CW的内容可以参考现有技术
通常，可以将系统支持的DMRS端口划分为多个端口组，每个端口组中的各个DMRS端口之间满足QCL关系，每个端口组中的任一DMRS端口与任一其他端口组中的任一DMRS端口满足Non-QCL关系。当多个发射端设备为同一接收端设备服务时，为每个发射端设备分配的DMRS端口来自同一端口组。例如，可以将DMRS端口0～9划分为2个端口组，分别为端口组1和端口组2，其中DMRS端口0～4属于端口组1，DMRS端口5～9属于端口组2。在为发射端设备分配DMRS端口时，可以将端口组1中的任意数量的DMRS端口分配给发射端设备，也可以将端口组2中的任意数量的DMRS端口分配给发射端设备。此外，无论是多个发射端设备为同一接收端设备服务，还是单个发射端设备为该接收端设备服务，为同一个发射端设备分配的DMRS 端口，可以来自相同的端口组，也可以来自不同的端口组。例如，当来自相同的端口组时，可以将上述端口组1中的端口1和端口2分配给该发射端设备；当来自不同的端口组时，可以将上述端口组1中的端口2～3和上述端口组2中的端口8～9分配给该发射端设备。不难理解，当为同一发射端设备分配的DMRS端口来自不同的端口组时，该发射端设备通过不同端口组中的DMRS端口进行的无线传输将具有Non-QCL特性，例如具有不同的大尺度衰落，或者指向不同的空间方向。当为同一发射端设备分配的DMRS端口来自相同的端口组时，该发射端设备通过该相同的端口组中的DMRS端口进行的无线传输将具有QCL特性，例如具有相似的大尺度衰落，或者指向相似的空间方向。
上述将DMRS端口划分为多个端口组的相关内容可以参考现有技术，例如，可以在发射端设备和接收端设备出厂之前，预先在这些设备内设置，也可以由发射端设备将DMRS端口的分组情况提前通知给接收端设备，例如但不限于发射端设备通过RRC(Radio Resource Control，无线资源控制)消息，在例如但不限于接收端设备接入通信网络，或者定期的，通知给接收端设备。在将DMRS端口划分为多个端口组的情况下，可以依照分组情况和具体需要(例如各种应用场景，如CoMP)为发射端设备分配DMRS端口。
多个发射端设备可以为多个发射端设备，也可以为一个同一发射端设备的多块天线面板。上述发射端设备可以是例如但不限于基站。上述接收端设备可以是例如但不限于终端。
码字到数据流的映射过程，以及从数据流恢复出码字的过程，可以参考现有技术。
当多个发射端设备同时为一个接收端设备服务时，上述指示信息可以由多个发射端设备中的一个发射端设备来发送，在这种情况下，发送上述指示信息的发射端设备可以称为服务设备，其他发射端设备可以称为协作设备。
上述数据流又可以称为数据层，其通常可通过对码字进行层映射来获得，具体过程可以参考现有技术。
上述方法中的步骤可以通过一个或者多个处理器来执行，有可以通过一个或者多个处理器执行程序来执行。
上述发射端设备和接收端设备中的各个模块的功能可以集成在一个或者多个处理器上来执行，也可以通过一个或者多个处理器执行程序来执行。
在上述实施例中，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件程序实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式来实现。该计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行计算机程序指令时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或者数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line，DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是 包含一个或多个可以用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)，光介质(例如，DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state disk，SSD))等。
尽管在此结合各实施例对本申请进行了描述，然而，在实施所要求保护的本申请过程中，本领域技术人员通过查看所述附图、公开内容、以及所附权利要求书，可理解并实现所述公开实施例的其他变化。在权利要求中，“包括”(comprising)一词不排除其他组成部分或步骤，“一”或“一个”不排除多个的情况。单个处理器或其他单元可以实现权利要求中列举的若干项功能。相互不同的从属权利要求中记载了某些措施，但这并不表示这些措施不能组合起来产生良好的效果。
尽管结合具体特征及其实施例对本申请进行了描述，显而易见的，在不脱离本申请的精神和范围的情况下，可对其进行各种修改和组合。相应地，本说明书和附图仅仅是所附权利要求所界定的本申请的示例性说明，且视为已覆盖本申请范围内的任意和所有修改、变化、组合或等同物。显然，本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的精神和范围。这样，倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内，则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。

Claims (74)

  1. 一种解调参考信号指示方法，其特征在于，包括：
    发射端根据DMRS配置信息得到DMRS指示信息；所述DMRS指示信息指示天线端口的码分复用CDM组信息，所述CDM组信息包括CDM组个数；
    所述发射端发送所述DMRS指示信息。
  2. 一种发射端，其特征在于，包括：
    处理器，根据DMRS配置信息得到DMRS指示信息；所述DMRS指示信息指示天线端口的码分复用CDM组信息，所述CDM组信息包括CDM组个数；
    收发器，发送所述DMRS指示信息。
  3. 如权利要求1所述的方法，或权利要求2所述的发射端，其特征在于，所述发射端根据DMRS配置信息得到DMRS指示信息，之前包括：
    所述发射端从多组解调参考信号DMRS配置信息中确定与当前DMRS传输方案对应的DMRS配置信息，并根据DMRS配置信息得到所述DMRS指示信息；所述每组DMRS配置信息包含多条DMRS配置信息。
  4. 如权利要求1所述的方法或权利要求2所述的发射端，其特征在于，所述CDM组个数为系统中有被占用或调度可能性的，不用于传输数据的CDM组的个数。
  5. 如权利要求4所述的方法或发射端，其特征在于，所述CDM组个数信息的值为1时，表示CDM组1被占用或调度，CDM组个数信息的值为2时，表示CDM组1和CDM组2被占用或调度，所述CDM组个数信息的值为3时，表示CDM组1、CDM组2、CDM组3被占用或调度。
  6. 如权利要求1所述的方法或权利要求2所述的发射端，其特征在于，所述DMRS配置信息中还包括DMRS的符号信息。
  7. 如权利要求5至6中任一项所述的方法或发射端，其特征在于，所述DMRS配置信息中，DMRS类型1和DMRS类型2的DMRS端口映射规则如下：
    对于1符号DMRS类型1，CDM组1包含的端口为{0,1},CDM组2包含的端口为{2,3}；
    对于2符号DMRS类型1，CDM组1包含的端口为{0,1,4,5},CDM组2包含的端口为{2,3,6,7}；
    对于1符号DMRS类型2，CDM组1包含的端口为{0,1},CDM组2包含端口为{2,3}，CDM组3包含的端口为{4,5}；
    对于2符号DMRS类型2，CDM组1包含的端口为{0,1,6,7},CDM组2包含的端口为{2,3,8,9}，CDM组3包含的端口为{4,5,10,11}。
  8. 如权利要求7所述的的方法或发射端，其特征在于，所述DMRS类型1对应的DMRS配置信息中，CDM组个数，端口，符号数之间的对应关系满足下表的一行或多行所示的对应关系：
    Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-100001
  9. 如权利要求7所述的的方法或发射端，其特征在于，所述DMRS类型2对应 的DMRS配置信息中，CDM组个数，端口，符号数之间的对应关系满足下表的一行或多行所示的对应关系：
    Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-100002
    Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-100003
  10. 如权利要求1所述的方法或权利要求2所述的发射端，其特征在于，通过RRC信令配置所述DMRS配置信息可使用的范围，该可使用的范围是基于DMRS的符号信息或者DMRS最大符号个数来确定的。
  11. 如权利要求1所述的方法或权利要求2所述的发射端，其特征在于，所述DMRS配置信息可使用的范围与无线资源控制信令RRC中指示DMRS最大符号个数的参数关联。
  12. 如权利要求1所述的方法或权利要求2所述的发射端，其特征在于，对于2符号DMRS类型2，利用所述DMRS配置信息进行单用户SU调度时，优先在CDM组1和CDM组2内进行频分复用FDM调度。
  13. 如权利要求12所述的方法或发射端，其特征在于，所述对于2符号DMRS类型2，利用所述DMRS配置信息进行单用户SU调度时，优先在CDM组1和CDM组2内进行频分复用FDM调度，当CDM组个数的值为2时，6层传输层或6个DMRS端口被调用时从所述CDM组1对应的DMRS端口0,1,6,7中调度DMRS端口0,1,6；从所述CDM组2对应的DMRS端口2,3,8,9中调度DMRS端口2,3,8；
    当CDM组个数的值为2时，8层传输层或8个DMRS端口被调用时，从所述CDM组1对应的DMRS端口0,1,6,7中调度DMRS端口0,1,6,7；从所述CDM组2对应的DMRS端口2,3,8,9中调度DMRS端口2,3,8,9。
  14. 一种接收解调参考信号的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    接收端接收发射端发送的解调参考信号DMRS指示信息；所述DMRS指示信息指示天线端口的码分复用CDM组信息，所述CDM组信息包括CDM组个数；
    所述接收端根据接收的所述DMRS指示信息，辅助解调数据。
  15. 一种接收端，其特征在于，包括：
    收发器，接收发射端发送的解调参考信号DMRS指示信息；所述DMRS指示信息所述DMRS指示信息指示天线端口的码分复用CDM组信息，所述CDM组信息包括CDM组个数；
    处理器，根据收发器接收的所述DMRS指示信息，辅助解调数据。
  16. 如权利要求14所述方法，或权利要求15所述的接收端，其特征在于，所述DMRS指示信息是所述发射端从多组解调参考信号DMRS配置信息中确定与当前DMRS传输方案对应的DMRS配置信息，并根据DMRS配置信息得到DMRS指示信息；所述每组DMRS配置信息包含多条DMRS配置信息。
  17. 如权利要求14所述的方法或权利要求15所述的接收端，其特征在于，所述CDM组个数为系统中可能被占用或调度，不用于传输数据的CDM组的个数。
  18. 如权利要求17所述的方法或接收端，其特征在于，所述CDM组个数信息的值为1时，表示CDM组1被占用或调度，CDM组个数信息的值为2时，表示CDM组1和CDM组2被占用或调度，所述CDM组个数信息的值为3时，表示CDM组1、CDM组2、CDM组3被占用或调度。
  19. 如权利要求14所述的方法或权利要求15所述的接收端，其特征在于，所述DMRS配置信息中还包括DMRS的符号信息。
  20. 如权利要求17至19中任一项所述的方法或接收端，其特征在于，所述DMRS配置信息中，DMRS类型1和DMRS类型2的具体DMRS端口映射规则如下：
    对于1符号DMRS类型1，CDM组1包含的端口为{0,1},CDM组2包含的端口为{2,3}；
    对于2符号DMRS类型1，CDM组1包含的端口为{0,1,4,5},CDM组2包含的端口为{2,3,6,7}；
    对于1符号DMRS类型2，CDM组1包含的端口为{0,1},CDM组2包含端口为{2,3}，CDM组3包含的端口为{4,5}；
    对于2符号DMRS类型2，CDM组1包含的端口为{0,1,6,7},CDM组2包含的端口为{2,3,8,9}，CDM组3包含的端口为{4,5,10,11}。
  21. 如权利要求20所述的方法或接收端，其特征在于，所述DMRS类型1对应 的DMRS配置信息中，CDM组个数，端口，符号数之间的对应关系满足下表的一行或多行所示的对应关系：
    Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-100004
  22. 如权利要求20所述的方法或接收端，其特征在于，所述DMRS类型2对应的DMRS配置信息中，CDM组个数，端口，符号数之间的对应关系满足下表的一行 或多行所示的对应关系：
    Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-100005
    Figure PCTCN2018096201-appb-100006
  23. 如权利要求14所述的方法或权利要求15所述的接收端，其特征在于，通过RRC信令配置所述DMRS配置信息可使用的范围，该可使用的范围是基于DMRS的符号信息或者DMRS最大符号个数来确定的。
  24. 如权利要求14所述的方法或权利要求15所述的接收端，其特征在于，所述DMRS配置信息可使用的范围与无线资源控制信令RRC中指示DMRS最大符号个数的参数关联。
  25. 一种芯片，其特征在于，包括处理器和接口；
    所述处理器为如权利要求2～13中任一项所述的发射端或如权利要求15～24中任一项所述的接收端中的处理器。
  26. 一种通信系统，其特征在于，包括：
    如权利要求2～13中任一项所述的发射端和，如权利要求15～24中任一项所述的接收端。
  27. 一种计算机存储介质，用于储存如权利要求2～13中任一项所述的发射端所用的计算机软件指令。
  28. 一种计算机存储介质，用于储存如权利要求15～24中任一项所述的接收端所用的计算机软件指令。
  29. 一种解调参考信号指示方法，其特征在于，包括：
    发射端从多组解调参考信号DMRS配置信息中确定与当前DMRS传输方案对应的DMRS配置信息，并根据DMRS配置信息得到DMRS指示信息；所述每组DMRS配置信息包含多条DMRS配置信息；
    所述发射端发送所述DMRS指示信息。
  30. 一种发射端，其特征在于，包括：
    处理器，从多组解调参考信号DMRS配置信息中确定与当前DMRS传输方案对应的DMRS配置信息，并根据DMRS配置信息得到DMRS指示信息；所述每组DMRS配置信息包含多条DMRS配置信息；
    收发器，发送所述DMRS指示信息。
  31. 如权利要求29所述的方法或权利要求30所述的发射端，其特征在于，所述确定与当前DMRS传输方案对应的DMRS配置信息之前，还包括：
    发送DMRS传输方案指示信息，用于指示所述当前DMRS传输方案；不同的DMRS传输方案对应的最大可支持正交端口数不同，或对应的DMRS图样或对应的DMRS配置类型不同。
  32. 如权利要求31所述的方法或发射端，其特征在于，所述DMRS传输方案指示信息通过高层信令发送，和/或所述DMRS指示信息通过下行控制信息或媒体接入控制控制单元发送。
  33. 如权利要求31或32所述的方法或发射端，其特征在于，所述不同的DMRS传输方案对应的DMRS配置信息的最大可支持正交端口数不同。
  34. 如权利要求31或32所述的方法或发射端，其特征在于，所述不同的DMRS传输方案对应的DMRS指示信息的长度不同。
  35. 如权利要求31或32所述的方法或发射端，其特征在于，所述至少一条DMRS配置信息中的多个DMRS端口分属不同的码分多址CDM组，其中不同的CDM组之间满足非准共址QCL关系。
  36. 如权利要求29所述的方法或权利要求30所述的发射端，其特征在于，所述DMRS配置信息中还包括总正交端口数的指示信息，该指示信息可以指示实际可能出现的所有正交端口数，或者实际可能出现的所有正交端口数的量化值。
  37. 如权利要求36所述的方法或发射端，其特征在于，所述所有正交端口数的量化值可以是DMRS正交层数信息，或者是DMRS天线正交端口集合指示信息，或者DMRS天线正交端口的CDM组信息，或者是依据CDM大小生成的信息。
  38. 如权利要求29所述的方法或权利要求31所述的发射端，其特征在于，所述DMRS配置信息依据总的最大可支持正交端口数或依据接收端的传输层数进行分列。
  39. 如权利要求38所述的方法或发射端，其特征在于，所述最大可支持正交端口数包括4、6、8、12中的至少两个。
  40. 一种接收解调参考信号的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    接收端接收发射端发送的解调参考信号DMRS指示信息；所述DMRS指示信息是发射端根据DMRS配置信息得到的，所述DMRS配置信息是发射端根据当前DMRS传输方案从多组解调参考信号DMRS配置信息中确定的；所述每组DMRS配置信息包含多条DMRS配置信息；
    所述接收端根据接收的所述DMRS指示信息，辅助解调数据。
  41. 一种接收端，其特征在于，包括：
    收发器，接收发射端发送的解调参考信号DMRS指示信息；所述DMRS指示信息是发射端根据DMRS配置信息得到的，所述DMRS配置信息是发射端根据当前DMRS传输方案从多组解调参考信号DMRS配置信息中确定的；所述每组DMRS配置信息包含多条DMRS配置信息；
    处理器，根据收发器接收的所述DMRS指示信息，得到DMRS配置信息并辅助解调数据。
  42. 如权利要求40所述的方法或权利要求41所述的接收端，其特征在于，所述接收发射端发送的解调参考信号DMRS指示信息之前，还包括：
    接收DMRS传输方案指示信息，所述DMRS方案指示信息用于指示当前DMRS传输方案；不同的DMRS传输方案对应的最大可支持正交端口数不同，或对应的DMRS图样或对应的DMRS配置类型不同。
  43. 如权利要求42所述的方法或接收端，其特征在于，通过高层信令接收所述DMRS传输方案指示信息。
  44. 如权利要求40所述的方法或权利要求41所述的装置，其特征在于，所述接收端本地存储有DMRS配置信息，所述不同的DMRS传输方案对应的DMRS配置信息的最大可支持正交端口数不同。
  45. 如权利要求44所述的方法或接收端，其特征在于，所述不同的DMRS传输方案对应的DMRS指示信息的长度不同。
  46. 如权利要求40所述的方法或权利要求41所述的接收端，其特征在于，所 述DMRS配置信息中还包括总正交端口数的指示信息，该指示信息可以指示实际可能出现的所有正交端口数，或者实际可能出现的所有正交端口数的量化值。
  47. 如权利要求46所述的方法或接收端，其特征在于，所述所有正交端口数的量化值可以是DMRS正交层数信息，或者是DMRS天线正交端口集合指示信息，或者DMRS天线正交端口的CDM组信息，或者是依据CDM大小生成的信息。
  48. 如如权利要求40所述的方法或权利要求41所述的接收端，其特征在于，所述DMRS配置信息依据总的最大可支持正交端口数或依据接收端的传输层数进行分列。
  49. 如权利要求48所述的方法或装置，其特征在于，所述最大可支持正交端口数包括4、6、8、12中的至少两个。
  50. 一种解调参考信号指示方法，其特征在于，包括：
    发射端生成解调参考信号DMRS指示信息；所述DMRS指示信息用于指示可用于承载DMRS的资源中未被DMRS占用的资源；
    所述发射端发送所述DMRS指示信息。
  51. 一种发射端，其特征在于，包括：
    处理器，生成解调参考信号DMRS指示信息；所述DMRS指示信息用于指示可用于承载DMRS的资源中未被DMRS占用的资源；
    收发器，发送所述DMRS指示信息。
  52. 如权利要求50所述的方法或权利要求51所述的发射端，其特征在于，所述DMRS指示信息通过指示量化的当前正交传输层数，或当前已被使用端口组状态组合，或当前非本接收端使用的正交传输层数或端口组状态，或需被静默的资源单元，以指示可用于承载DMRS的资源中未被DMRS占用的资源。
  53. 如权利要求50所述的方法或权利要求51所述的发射端，其特征在于，发送所述DMRS指示信息之前，还包括：
    发送DMRS传输方案指示信息，用于指示所述当前DMRS传输方案；不同的DMRS传输方案对应的最大可支持正交端口数不同，或对应的DMRS图样或对应的DMRS配置类型不同。
  54. 如权利要求53所述的方法或发射端，其特征在于，所述DMRS指示信息是从DMRS配置信息中确定的，所述DMRS配置信息包括总正交端口数的指示信息，该总正交端口数的指示信息可以指示实际可能出现的所有正交端口数，或者实际可能出现的所有正交端口数的量化值。
  55. 如权利要求54所述的方法或发射端，其特征在于，所述所有正交端口数的量化值是DMRS正交层数信息，或者是DMRS天线正交端口集合指示信息，或者DMRS天线正交端口的CDM组信息，或者是依据CDM大小生成的信息。
  56. 如权利要求50所述的方法或权利要求51所述的发射端，其特征在于，所述DMRS指示信息通过下行控制信息或媒体接入控制控制单元发送或无线资源控制信令RRC的至少一种。
  57. 如权利要求50所述的方法或权利要求51所述的发射端，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    以信令的方式发送所述DMRS指示信息与可用于承载DMRS的资源中未被DMRS占用的资源之间的对应关系。
  58. 如权利要求56所述的方法或发射端，其特征在于，由DMRS码字的个数确定是否发送所述DMRS指示信息。
  59. 如权利要求55所述的方法或发射端，其特征在于，所述DMRS正交层数信息中，所述的DMRS正交层数是一个CDM组中的DMRS天线端口数量的整数倍；或者是一个CDM组中序号连续的DMRS天线端口数量的整数倍；或者是一个CDM组中的DMRS天线端口的序号的值。
  60. 一种解调参考信号的接收方法，其特征在于，包括：
    接收端接收解调参考信号DMRS指示信息；所述DMRS指示信息用于指示可用于承载DMRS的资源中未被DMRS占用的资源；
    所述接收端根据所述DMRS指示信息，在未被DMRS占用的资源上进行数据解调。
  61. 一种接收端，其特征在于，包括：
    收发器，用于接收解调参考信号DMRS指示信息；所述DMRS指示信息用于指示可用于承载DMRS的资源中未被DMRS占用的资源；
    处理器，用于根据所述DMRS指示信息，在未被DMRS占用的资源上进行数据解调。
  62. 如权利要求60所述的方法或权利要求61所述的接收端，其特征在于，所述接收端根据接收到的DMRS指示信息，获得量化的当前正交传输层数，或当前已被使用端口组状态组合，或当前非本接收端使用的正交传输层数或端口组状态，或需被静默的资源单元，以获得可用于承载DMRS的资源中未被DMRS占用的资源。
  63. 如权利要求60所述的方法或权利要求61所述接收端，其特征在于，所述接收DMRS指示信息之前，包括：
    接收指示所述当前DMRS传输方案的DMRS传输方案指示信息；不同的DMRS传输方案对应的最大可支持正交端口数不同，或对应的DMRS图样或对应的DMRS配置类型不同。
  64. 如权利要求60所述的方法或权利要求61所述的接收端，其特征在于，所述接收端还存储有DMRS配置信息，所述DMRS配置信息还包括总正交端口数的指示信息，该总正交端口数的指示信息可以指示实际可能出现的所有正交端口数，或者实际可能出现的所有正交端口数的量化值。
  65. 如权利要求64所述的方法或接收端，其特征在于，所述所有正交端口数的量化值是DMRS正交层数信息，或者是DMRS天线正交端口集合指示信息，或者DMRS天线正交端口的CDM组信息，或者是依据CDM大小生成的信息。
  66. 如权利要求60所述的方法或61所述的接收端，其特征在于，所述接收DMRS指示信息，包括：
    通过下行控制信息或媒体接入控制控制单元或无线资源控制信令RRC的至少一种接收所述DMRS指示信息。
  67. 如权利要求60所述的方法或61所述的接收端，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收以信令的方式发送的所述DMRS指示信息与可用于承载DMRS的资源中未被DMRS占用的资源之间的对应关系。
  68. 如权利要求65所述的方法或接收端，其特征在于，所述DMRS正交层数信息中，所述的DMRS正交层数是一个CDM组中的DMRS天线端口数量的整数倍；或者是一个CDM组中序号连续的DMRS天线端口数量的整数倍；或者是一个CDM组中的DMRS天线端口的序号的值。
  69. 如权利要求37所述的方法或发射端，或权利要求47所述的方法或接收端，或权利要求55所述的方法或发射端，或权利要求65所述的方法或接收端，其特征在于，所述DMRS天线正交端口的CDM组信息为CDM组状态信息或CDM组序号或CDM组编号或CDM组个数。
  70. 如权利要求29所述的方法或权利要求30所述的发射端，或权利要求40所述的方法或权利要求41所述的接收端，或权利要求50所述的方法或权利要求51所述的发射端，或权利要求60所述的方法或权利要求61所述的接收端，其特征在于，所述DMRS配置信息中还包括DMRS的符号信息。
  71. 如权利要求29所述的方法或权利要求30所述的发射端，或权利要求40所 述的方法或权利要求41所述的接收端，或权利要求50所述的方法或权利要求51所述的发射端，或权利要求60所述的方法或权利要求61所述的接收端，其特征在于，通过RRC信令配置所述DMRS配置信息可使用的范围，该可使用的范围是基于DMRS的符号信息或者DMRS最大符号个数来确定的。
  72. 如权利要求29所述的方法或权利要求30所述的发射端，或权利要求40所述的方法或权利要求41所述的接收端，或权利要求50所述的方法或权利要求51所述的发射端，或权利要求60所述的方法或权利要求61所述的接收端，其特征在于，所述DMRS配置信息可使用的范围与无线资源控制信令RRC中指示DMRS最大符号个数的参数关联。
  73. 如权利要求71或72所述的方法或发射端或接收端，其特征在于，所述DMRS最大符号个数不同时，进行DMRS端口调度的下行控制信息DCI信令长度不同，或DCI比特个数不同，或者DCI域不同。
  74. 如权利要求29所述的方法或权利要求30所述的发射端，或权利要求40所述的方法或权利要求41所述的接收端，或权利要求50所述的方法或权利要求51所述的发射端，或权利要求60所述的方法或权利要求6所述的接收端，其特征在于，利用所述DMRS配置信息进行单用户SU调度时，在2个CDM组内优先进行频分复用FDM调度。。
PCT/CN2018/096201 2017-08-11 2018-07-19 一种dmrs指示和接收方法，发射端和接收端 WO2019029329A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (9)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CA3053864A CA3053864C (en) 2017-08-11 2018-07-19 Dmrs indicating and receiving methods, transmit end, and receive end
KR1020197026180A KR102276142B1 (ko) 2017-08-11 2018-07-19 Ｄｍｒｓ 지시 및 수신 방법, 전송단 및 수신단
EP22185386.4A EP4145748A1 (en) 2017-08-11 2018-07-19 Dmrs indicating and receiving methods, transmit end, and receive end
JP2019543018A JP6943355B2 (ja) 2017-08-11 2018-07-19 Ｄｍｒｓを指示および受信する方法、送信端、ならびに、受信端
EP18843740.4A EP3584975B1 (en) 2017-08-11 2018-07-19 Methods for indicating and receiving dmrs, transmitting end, and receiving end
BR112019020884A BR112019020884A2 (pt) 2017-08-11 2018-07-19 métodos de indicação e recepção de dmrs, extremidade de transmissão, e extremidade de recepção
US16/517,198 US10715300B2 (en) 2017-08-11 2019-07-19 Demodulation reference signal indicating and receiving methods, transmit end, and receive end
US16/917,139 US11424898B2 (en) 2017-08-11 2020-06-30 Demodulation reference signal indicating and receiving methods, transmit end, and receive end
US17/876,301 US20230030162A1 (en) 2017-08-11 2022-07-28 Demodulation reference signal indicating and receiving methods, transmit end, and receive end

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201710686645.9 2017-08-11
CN201710686645 2017-08-11
CN201711147995.4 2017-11-17

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/517,198 Continuation US10715300B2 (en) 2017-08-11 2019-07-19 Demodulation reference signal indicating and receiving methods, transmit end, and receive end

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019029329A1 true WO2019029329A1 (zh) 2019-02-14

Family

ID=65278997

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2018/096201 WO2019029329A1 (zh) 2017-08-11 2018-07-19 一种dmrs指示和接收方法，发射端和接收端

Country Status (8)

Country Link
US (3) US10715300B2 (zh)
EP (2) EP4145748A1 (zh)
JP (1) JP6943355B2 (zh)
KR (1) KR102276142B1 (zh)
CN (3) CN109995498B (zh)
BR (1) BR112019020884A2 (zh)
CA (1) CA3053864C (zh)
WO (1) WO2019029329A1 (zh)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20200412516A1 (en) * 2018-02-16 2020-12-31 Ntt Docomo, Inc. Radio transmission device
US20210297214A1 (en) * 2018-08-10 2021-09-23 Chenxi HAO Quasi-colocation indication for demodulation reference signals
US11711188B2 (en) 2019-07-30 2023-07-25 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. DMRS port indication method and apparatus

Families Citing this family (30)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPWO2018142506A1 (ja) * 2017-02-01 2019-02-07 三菱電機株式会社 送信装置、受信装置、基地局、端末および送信方法
WO2019027151A1 (ko) * 2017-08-04 2019-02-07 엘지전자 주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서 참조 신호를 송수신하기 위한 방법 및 이를 위하 장치
CN109995498B (zh) * 2017-08-11 2020-03-10 华为技术有限公司 一种dmrs指示和接收方法，发射端和接收端
CN109802807B (zh) * 2017-11-17 2020-07-28 电信科学技术研究院 信息指示、资源确定方法及装置、计算机存储介质
US11122602B2 (en) * 2018-07-11 2021-09-14 QUALCMOM Incorporated Shared channel rate matching with wideband demodulation reference signal for a control channel
WO2020034055A1 (en) * 2018-08-13 2020-02-20 Qualcomm Incorporated Layer mapping for multi-trp transmission
US11184134B2 (en) * 2018-12-06 2021-11-23 Qualcomm Incorporated Power imbalance solutions for multiple input multiple output transmissions
KR20200069909A (ko) * 2018-12-07 2020-06-17 삼성전자주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서 전송 전력을 제어하는 방법 및 장치
US10951282B2 (en) 2019-02-15 2021-03-16 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Facilitating selection of demodulation reference signal ports in advanced networks
US11265097B2 (en) * 2019-03-04 2022-03-01 Qualcomm Incorporated Code division multiplexing group hopping for multi-transmission/reception point
CN111769918B (zh) * 2019-03-30 2022-05-24 华为技术有限公司 Dmrs端口的指示方法及装置
US11558762B2 (en) * 2019-04-03 2023-01-17 Mediatek Inc. Techniques of controlling operation of M-DCI based M-TRP reception
CN111786755B (zh) * 2019-04-04 2021-11-19 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 一种tci指示方法、装置、基站及存储介质
CN115052351A (zh) * 2019-07-31 2022-09-13 华为技术有限公司 一种数据传输方法、装置及系统
WO2021030954A1 (zh) * 2019-08-16 2021-02-25 华为技术有限公司 传输模式确定方法及装置
US11626948B2 (en) * 2019-11-07 2023-04-11 Ofinno, Llc Antenna port indication based on maximum number of transmission layers
US11743004B2 (en) * 2019-11-15 2023-08-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Extended demodulation reference signal scrambling identifier for demodulation reference signal communication
CN115176489A (zh) * 2020-02-20 2022-10-11 株式会社Ntt都科摩 终端、无线通信方法以及基站
US11310021B2 (en) 2020-05-18 2022-04-19 Qualcomm Incorporated Uplink doppler metric estimation based on a downlink reference signal
US11483112B2 (en) 2020-05-18 2022-10-25 Qualcomm Incorporated Uplink doppler metric estimation based on an uplink reference signal
CA3187908A1 (en) * 2020-08-01 2022-02-10 Yawei YU Uplink transmission method and related apparatus
CN114205909A (zh) * 2020-09-18 2022-03-18 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法及通信装置
CN116648872A (zh) * 2020-12-31 2023-08-25 华为技术有限公司 发送和接收解调参考信号的方法以及通信装置
CN115765940A (zh) * 2021-09-02 2023-03-07 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种参考信号的传输方法及装置
KR20240065102A (ko) * 2021-09-30 2024-05-14 지티이 코포레이션 채널 추정 및 데이터 송신을 위한 복조 기준 신호에서 자원 요소의 구성
CN115913494A (zh) * 2021-09-30 2023-04-04 华为技术有限公司 参考信号的传输方法和通信装置
CN116032441A (zh) * 2021-10-25 2023-04-28 华为技术有限公司 信息传输方法及装置
WO2023204659A1 (ko) * 2022-04-22 2023-10-26 엘지전자 주식회사 무선통신 시스템에서 복조 참조신호 수신 방법 및 이를 위한 장치
WO2024020963A1 (zh) * 2022-07-28 2024-02-01 北京小米移动软件有限公司 解调参考信号dmrs的配置方法、装置、设备及介质
WO2024092477A1 (zh) * 2022-10-31 2024-05-10 北京小米移动软件有限公司 天线端口的信息的指示方法、装置、通信设备及存储介质

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102158302A (zh) * 2010-02-11 2011-08-17 电信科学技术研究院 一种信息指示的方法及设备
US20130039332A1 (en) * 2011-08-12 2013-02-14 Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Method and apparatus for multiple-input multiple-output operation
CN102957471A (zh) * 2011-08-19 2013-03-06 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种解调参考信号的增强方法和系统
CN103684676A (zh) * 2012-09-26 2014-03-26 中兴通讯股份有限公司 天线端口位置关系的通知和确定方法、系统及装置
CN106470087A (zh) * 2015-08-19 2017-03-01 中国移动通信集团公司 Dmrs指示方法、系统、基站及用户设备

Family Cites Families (17)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101365232B (zh) * 2007-08-10 2012-02-29 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种长期演进系统中解调参考信号模式的通知方法
CN101800622B (zh) * 2010-01-08 2015-10-21 中兴通讯股份有限公司 物理上行共享信道的信令配置方法及系统
EP2526632B1 (en) 2010-01-20 2016-11-02 Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) Antenna port mapping method and device for demodulation reference signals
EP2528244B1 (en) 2010-01-22 2018-03-07 LG Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for providing downlink control information in an mimo wireless communication system
CN102088429B (zh) 2010-02-11 2013-09-18 电信科学技术研究院 一种解调参考符号端口映射的方法及设备
CN102082595B (zh) * 2010-04-30 2013-08-07 电信科学技术研究院 一种配置dmrs的方法、装置及系统
WO2013070020A1 (ko) * 2011-11-09 2013-05-16 엘지전자 주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서 신호 복호 방법 및 장치
WO2013165206A1 (ko) * 2012-05-03 2013-11-07 엘지전자 주식회사 데이터 전송 방법 및 장치
EP2899899B1 (en) 2012-09-18 2017-11-15 LG Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for receiving system information in wireless communication system
US9337974B2 (en) 2014-03-28 2016-05-10 Intel IP Corporation User equipment generation and signaling of feedback for supporting adaptive demodulation reference signal transmission
WO2015188355A1 (zh) 2014-06-12 2015-12-17 华为技术有限公司 一种资源分配方法及装置
JP6373708B2 (ja) 2014-09-30 2018-08-15 株式会社Ｓｃｒｅｅｎホールディングス プラズマ処理装置およびプラズマ処理方法
WO2016127309A1 (en) 2015-02-10 2016-08-18 Qualcomm Incorporated Dmrs enhancement for higher order mu-mimo
US10644903B2 (en) 2015-07-06 2020-05-05 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for measuring channel in mobile communication system
CN106470088B (zh) * 2015-08-14 2021-06-15 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Dmrs端口或映射关系的通知、确定方法及装置
KR101971972B1 (ko) * 2017-01-09 2019-04-24 엘지전자 주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서, 참조 신호를 전송하는 방법 및 이를 위한 장치
CN109995498B (zh) * 2017-08-11 2020-03-10 华为技术有限公司 一种dmrs指示和接收方法，发射端和接收端

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102158302A (zh) * 2010-02-11 2011-08-17 电信科学技术研究院 一种信息指示的方法及设备
US20130039332A1 (en) * 2011-08-12 2013-02-14 Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Method and apparatus for multiple-input multiple-output operation
CN102957471A (zh) * 2011-08-19 2013-03-06 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种解调参考信号的增强方法和系统
CN103684676A (zh) * 2012-09-26 2014-03-26 中兴通讯股份有限公司 天线端口位置关系的通知和确定方法、系统及装置
CN106470087A (zh) * 2015-08-19 2017-03-01 中国移动通信集团公司 Dmrs指示方法、系统、基站及用户设备

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP3584975A4 *

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20200412516A1 (en) * 2018-02-16 2020-12-31 Ntt Docomo, Inc. Radio transmission device
US11671216B2 (en) * 2018-02-16 2023-06-06 Ntt Docomo, Inc. Radio transmission device
US20210297214A1 (en) * 2018-08-10 2021-09-23 Chenxi HAO Quasi-colocation indication for demodulation reference signals
US11863479B2 (en) * 2018-08-10 2024-01-02 Qualcomm Incorporated Quasi-colocation indication for demodulation reference signals
US11711188B2 (en) 2019-07-30 2023-07-25 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. DMRS port indication method and apparatus

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN109995498B (zh) 2020-03-10
JP6943355B2 (ja) 2021-09-29
CA3053864A1 (en) 2019-02-14
CN109391456B (zh) 2022-02-15
US11424898B2 (en) 2022-08-23
US20190342062A1 (en) 2019-11-07
CN109995499A (zh) 2019-07-09
KR102276142B1 (ko) 2021-07-12
KR20190110618A (ko) 2019-09-30
US20200336275A1 (en) 2020-10-22
CA3053864C (en) 2022-03-29
US20230030162A1 (en) 2023-02-02
EP3584975A1 (en) 2019-12-25
EP3584975B1 (en) 2023-02-22
CN109995498A (zh) 2019-07-09
EP3584975A4 (en) 2020-09-16
CN109391456A (zh) 2019-02-26
US10715300B2 (en) 2020-07-14
BR112019020884A2 (pt) 2020-04-28
CN109995499B (zh) 2020-04-03
EP4145748A1 (en) 2023-03-08
JP2020517129A (ja) 2020-06-11

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2019029329A1 (zh) 一种dmrs指示和接收方法，发射端和接收端
CN108809609B (zh) 一种dmrs指示和接收方法，发射端和接收端
US20200367242A1 (en) Method for transmitting and receiving downlink channel and reference signal in communication system
US8873489B2 (en) Signaling methods for UE-specific dynamic downlink scheduler in OFDMA systems
JP5513629B2 (ja) 多重入出力伝送のためのアップリンク復調参照信号の設計
US9497749B2 (en) Method for transmitting and receiving control information of a mobile communication system
JP5883930B2 (ja) 無線通信システムにおいて基地局が下りリンク制御チャネルを送信する方法及びそのための装置
WO2019029401A1 (zh) 参考信号信息的配置方法及装置
JP2015035823A (ja) 無線通信システムでリソースブロックをバンドリングするためのシステム及び方法
WO2014110928A1 (zh) 上行解调参考信号的发送方法、装置和系统
WO2013000253A1 (zh) 协作多点传输系统中信息的交互方法及协作多点传输系统
EP3691381A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting downlink control information, and method and apparatus for obtaining number of blind detections
WO2019095478A1 (zh) 一种下行控制信息的发送方法、终端设备和网络设备
WO2021018209A1 (zh) 一种dmrs端口指示方法及装置
WO2018201830A1 (zh) 资源配置方法、装置、存储介质及处理器
WO2024061236A1 (zh) 发送和接收参考信号的方法、通信装置
WO2023092158A2 (en) System and method for providing additional dm-rs ports for 5g mu-mimo transmission

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 18843740

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2019543018

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 3053864

Country of ref document: CA

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20197026180

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2018843740

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20190917

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: BR

Ref legal event code: B01A

Ref document number: 112019020884

Country of ref document: BR

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 112019020884

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20191004